You are on page 1of 332

< +HMI

Set-up Guidance
OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-64644EN-3/02

© FANUC CORPORATION, 2017


- No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
- The design and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan's "Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law".
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from
where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations
of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact
FANUC for advice.

In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.


There are, however, a very large number of operations that must not or cannot be performed, and if the
manual contained them all, it would be enormous in volume.
It is, therefore, requested to assume that any operations that are not explicitly described as being possible
are "not possible".

Program and device names belonging to companies other than FANUC in this manual include registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
However, the ® and ™ marks may be omitted for some of those names.
B-64644EN-3/02

CHAPTER CONTENTS

1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1


2 MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 2
3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 3
4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION) . . . . . . . . .81 4
5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION) . . . . . . . .201 5
6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 6
7 MOTION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 7
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
A

c-1
B-64644EN-3/02

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

c-2
B-64644EN-3/02

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
2
1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.1 ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION ............................2
1.1.1 Flow of Measurement ....................................................................... 2
3
1.1.2 Measurement Cycle Menu ............................................................... 2
1.1.3 Measurement Cycle Settings ........................................................... 3 4
1.1.3.1 Setting not to close the screen when moving to another
screen ....................................................................................... 3
1.1.3.2 Changing the tier of soft keys displayed to the first .................. 4 5
1.1.4 Function That Cannot Be Used Concurrently ................................... 4
1.2 ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN ................................5
1.2.1 Details on the Cycle Selection Screen ............................................. 5 6
1.2.1.1 Cycle category tab display in the cycle selection screen .......... 6
1.2.1.2 Cycle list display in the cycle selection screen ......................... 6
1.2.1.3 Soft key display in the cycle selection screen ........................... 6 7
1.3 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN ..............8
1.4 ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN ...............................10
1.4.1 Input Item Help Display .................................................................. 11
8
1.4.2 Input Item Setting Value Display in the Cycle Creation Screen ..... 12
1.4.3 Input Item Guidance Window Display in the Cycle Creation
Screen ............................................................................................ 12
A1
1.4.4 Soft Key Display in the Cycle Creation Screen .............................. 12
1.5 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN ..............14 A2
1.5.1 Editing Cycles ................................................................................. 15
2 MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.1 MANUAL MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE .........................18
Z
3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
3.1 OPERATION FLOW/SCREEN LAYOUT .....................................20
3.2 MENU SCREEN ..........................................................................22
3.3 MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT SCREEN ........................25
3.3.1 Tool Change Window ..................................................................... 27
3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES ...............................28
3.4.1 Workpiece Measurement ............................................................... 28
3.4.1.1 Face ........................................................................................ 28
3.4.1.2 Outer diameter circle ............................................................... 30
3.4.1.3 Inner diameter circle ............................................................... 33

c-3
B-64644EN-3/02

3.4.1.4 Outer width ............................................................................. 36


3.4.1.5 Inner width .............................................................................. 39
3.4.1.6 Outer corner ........................................................................... 41
3.4.1.7 Inner corner ............................................................................ 43
3.4.1.8 Workpiece slant ...................................................................... 46
1 3.4.2 Tool Measurement ......................................................................... 51
3.4.2.1 Milling tool ............................................................................... 51
2 3.4.2.2 Turning tool ............................................................................. 52
3.4.3 Machine Calibration ....................................................................... 55
3.4.3.1 Rotation axis position ............................................................. 55

3 3.4.4 Measurement Sensor Calibration .................................................. 61


3.4.4.1 Probe length ........................................................................... 61
3.4.4.2 Stylus ball diameter ................................................................ 64
4 3.4.4.3 Stylus Ball Offsets-A ............................................................... 65
3.5 EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN ...................................... 68
3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN ............ 71
5 3.6.1 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Workpiece
Coordinate Offset ........................................................................... 72
3.6.2 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Setting Destination
6 P Code Macro Data ....................................................................... 75
3.6.3 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Tool Offset ...... 78
4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION) . . . . .81
7 4.1 CALIBRATION ............................................................................ 82
G2000 Touch sensor position ............................................................................ 82
8 G2001
G2002
Probe length .......................................................................................... 84
Stylus ball diameter ............................................................................... 85
G2003 Stylus ball center offset A ...................................................................... 88

A1 G2004
G2005
Stylus ball center offset B ...................................................................... 90
Stylus ball diameter workpiece rotation ................................................. 93
G2006 Stylus ball offset A workpiece rotation ................................................... 95

A2 G2007 Stylus ball offset B workpiece rotation ................................................... 98


4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT ........................................................... 101
G2010 Milling tool measurement ..................................................................... 101
Z G2011 Turning tool measurement ................................................................... 104
4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP ............................................................... 108
G2020 End face measurement (X-axis direction) ............................................ 108
G2021 End face measurement (Y-axis direction) ............................................ 110
G2022 End face measurement (Z-axis direction) ............................................ 112
G2023 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 114
G2024 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 116
G2025 Outside width measurement ................................................................ 119
G2026 Inside width measurement ................................................................... 121
G2027 Outside corner measurement .............................................................. 123
G2028 Inside corner measurement ................................................................. 126
G2029 Workpiece angle measurement ........................................................... 128
G2031 C-axis phase outside width measurement ........................................... 131
G2032 C-axis phase inside width measurement ............................................. 133

c-4
B-64644EN-3/02

G2035 Workpiece setting error measurement (XY plane) ............................... 135


G2036 Workpiece setting error measurement (YZ plane) ............................... 137
G2037 Workpiece setting error measurement (YZ plane) ............................... 139
G2038 Workpiece setting error measurement (workpiece setting) .................. 140
4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION ............................................142
G2040 End face measurement (X-axis direction) ............................................ 142 1
G2041 End face measurement (Y-axis direction) ............................................ 144
G2042 End face measurement (Z-axis direction) ............................................ 145
G2043 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 147 2
G2044 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 149
G2045 Outside width measurement ................................................................ 152
G2046 Inside width measurement ................................................................... 154 3
G2047 Slant measurement indexing cycle ...................................................... 156
G2053 Outside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rotation) ................. 158
G2054 Inside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rotation) .................... 161 4
4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE) .........................................164
G2062 Stylus ball diameter .............................................................................. 164
G2063 Stylus ball center offset A .................................................................... 166 5
G2064 Stylus ball center offset B .................................................................... 169
4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE) ..............................172
G2073 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 172 6
G2074 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 174
4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE) ...........178
G2083 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 178 7
G2084 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 180
4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS
DIRECTION) ..............................................................................184 8
G2320 Center of circle that passes three holes - coordinate specification ...... 184
G2321 Cross of diagonals of four holes ........................................................... 187
4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION) .......191
A1
G2360 Center of circle that passes three holes - coordinate specification ...... 191
G2361
G2362
Cross of diagonals of four holes ........................................................... 194
Angle of line passing center of two holes ............................................. 197
A2
5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION) . . . .201
5.1 CALIBRATION ...........................................................................202 Z
G2100 Touch sensor position .......................................................................... 202
G2101 Probe length ......................................................................................... 204
G2102 Stylus ball diameter .............................................................................. 205
G2103 Stylus ball center offset A .................................................................... 208
G2104 Stylus ball center offset B .................................................................... 210
G2105 Stylus ball diameter workpiece rotation ................................................ 212
G2106 Stylus ball offset A workpiece rotation ................................................. 215
G2107 Stylus ball offset B workpiece rotation ................................................. 217
5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT ............................................................220
G2110 Milling tool measurement ..................................................................... 220
G2111 Turning tool measurement ................................................................... 223

c-5
B-64644EN-3/02

5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP ............................................................... 227


G2120 End face measurement (X-axis direction) ............................................ 227
G2121 End face measurement (Y-axis direction) ............................................ 229
G2122 End face measurement (Z-axis direction) ............................................ 231
G2123 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 233
1 G2124 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 235
G2125 Outside width measurement ................................................................ 238
2 G2126 Inside width measurement ................................................................... 240
G2127 Outside corner measurement .............................................................. 242
G2128 Inside corner measurement ................................................................. 245
G2129 Workpiece angle measurement ........................................................... 248
3 G2131
G2132
C-axis phase outside width measurement ........................................... 250
C-axis phase inside width measurement ............................................. 252
5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION ............................................ 255
4 G2140 End face measurement (X-axis direction) ............................................ 255
G2141 End face measurement (Y-axis direction) ............................................ 257
G2142 End face measurement (Z-axis direction) ............................................ 258
5 G2143 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 260
G2144 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 263
G2145 Outside width measurement ................................................................ 265
6 G2146 Inside width measurement ................................................................... 268
G2153 Outside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rotation) ................. 270
G2154 Inside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rotation) ................... 272
7 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE) ......................................... 275
G2162 Stylus ball diameter ............................................................................. 275
G2163 Stylus ball center offset A .................................................................... 277
8 G2164 Stylus ball center offset B .................................................................... 280
5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE) .............................. 283
G2173 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 283
A1 G2174 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 285
5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE) .......... 289
G2183 Outside diameter circle measurement ................................................. 289
A2 G2184 Inside diameter circle measurement .................................................... 292

6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295


Z 6.1 MODE SETTINGS .................................................................... 296
G2090 Feedback OFF ..................................................................................... 296
G2091 Feedback ON ....................................................................................... 296
G2092 NG alarm mode OFF ........................................................................... 297
G2093 NG alarm mode ON ............................................................................. 297
6.2 RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL INFORMATION ............ 298
6.3 SET-UP GUIDANCE USED IN A MULTI-PATH LATHE ........... 301
6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE
MACHINING COMMAND MODE .............................................. 302
7 MOTION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
7.1 MAKING SETTINGS BEFORE MEASUREMENT .................... 310

c-6
B-64644EN-3/02

A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
A.1 ALARMS ....................................................................................312

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

c-7
B-64644EN-3/02

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

c-8
1
CREATING 1

MACHINING CYCLE 2
3
4
5
You can select, create, and edit measurement cycles.

1.1 ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION ....................................... 2


6
1.2 ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN........................................... 5
1.3
1.4
OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN ......................... 8
ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN........................................... 10
7
1.5 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN ......................... 14
A

1
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.1 ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION

1.1

1.1 ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE


FUNCTION
1
1.1.1 Flow of Measurement
2
1.1.1

Turn on the measuring instrument, such as the probe or touch sensor, beforehand
and follow the steps below.

3 Select a cycle type (operation on the cycle selection screen)



Enter data for the cycle (operation on the cycle creation screen)
4 ↓
Measure

5 Fig. 1.1.1 Operation Steps for the Set-up Guidance Function

1.1.2 Measurement Cycle Menu


1.1.2

The types of cycle categories are as follows:


• Tool measurement cycle
• Work setup cycle
• Post check cycle
• Simple measurement cycle
• Calibration cycle

On the EDIT mode base screen, press the [Measure Cycle] soft key to display the
menu for the measurement cycle.

Fig. 1.1.2 Menu for the Measurement Cycle

Table 1.1.2 Menu for the Measurement Cycle


Title of the cycle selection Tool/probe category Description
screen
Tool Measurement Cycle Tool Installation Z Axis Milling tool
Direction Turning tool
Tool Installation X Axis Milling tool
Direction Turning tool

2
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.1 ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION

Title of the cycle selection Tool/probe category Description


screen
Work Setup Cycle Set Probe Z Direction Face
Center of circle
Center of width 1
Corner
Setting error
Slant
2
Cross
Set Probe X Direction Face 3
Center of circle
Center of width
Corner
4
Setting error
Part Check Cycle Set Probe Z Direction Face 5
Circle diameter
Width
Set Probe X Direction Face
Circle diameter
Width
Simple Measurement Cycle - Center of circle
Cross
Angle
Calibration Cycle Set Probe Z Direction Touch sensor
Probe
Stylus ball
Set Probe X Direction Touch sensor
Probe
Stylus ball

1.1.3 Measurement Cycle Settings


1.1.3

1.1.3.1 Setting not to close the screen when moving to another screen
You can set not to close the original screen when moving to another screen (function
1.1.3.1

to save the screen display status).


Not closing the screen allows you to view the contents previously displayed on it
when returning from another screen.

3
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.1 ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION

Table 1.1.3.1 Specifications of the Function to Save the Screen Display Status
Target screen transition/ Target function Target screen
operation
• Opening a slide • Measurement Cycle • Cycle Selection Screen
1 • Opening the Information
Center
• Cycle input screen

• Moving to the home screen

2 • Moving to another application


that closes iHMI
• Moving to another application
that does not close iHMI
3
4  • For details on the settings, contact the MTB.
MEMO

5
1.1.3.2 Changing the tier of soft keys displayed to the first
When the cycle input screen is closed with the [OK] soft key, the soft keys in the
1.1.3.2

second tier are normally displayed on the base screen.


You can change this behavior setting so that the soft keys in the first tier can be
displayed (menu selection soft key auto back function).

The setting change can be applied to the following function:


• Measurement Cycle

 • For details on the settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

1.1.4 Function That Cannot Be Used Concurrently


1.1.4

The set-up guidance function cannot be used when the following optional function is
enabled:
• Arbitrary axis switching function

To use the set-up guidance function, you need to disable the above optional function.

 • For details on the optional function settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

4
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.2 ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN

1.2

1.2 ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION


SCREEN
This section explains the cycle selection screen. 1

1.2.1 Details on the Cycle Selection Screen 2


1.2.1

The cycle selection screen allows you to make selections for the cycles.
The structure of the cycle selection screen is explained below. 3

A 4
B

C 5

Fig. 1.2.1 Cycle Selection Screen

Table 1.2.1 Structure of the Cycle Selection Screen


Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the cycle selection screen.
B Tool/probe category Displays the name of tool/probe categories. The category
currently selected is highlighted in green.
C Cycle category tab display Displays the sub-categories of the tool/probe categories.
Cycle categories are displayed.
D Cycle list display Displays the cycles that belong to the currently selected
cycle category. Cycle names are displayed.
E Message display Displays guidance and warning messages.
F Soft key display Displays the soft keys required for operations.

5
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.2 ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN

 •• The cycle categories vary according to machine settings.


When there is only one tool/probe category, the tool/probe category name is not
MEMO displayed.

1
1.2.1.1 Cycle category tab display in the cycle selection screen
2 The cycle category tab display shows sub-categories of the tool/probe categories.
1.2.1.1

The cycle category currently selected is displayed in blue.


You can select items with the corresponding soft keys.
3
4 Fig. 1.2.1.1 Tab Display

1.2.1.2 Cycle list display in the cycle selection screen


5 1.2.1.2

The cycle list display shows the names and icons of the cycles that belong to the
cycle category displayed with the cycle category tab.
The item currently selected is displayed with a blue background.

Fig. 1.2.1.2 Cycle List Display

 For details on cycle types displayed, see the appropriate "MEASUREMENT CYCLE"
chapter.
MEMO

1.2.1.3 Soft key display in the cycle selection screen


Soft keys required for operations are displayed at the bottom of the cycle selection
1.2.1.3

screen.

A B C

Fig. 1.2.1.3 Soft Key Display in the Cycle Selection Screen

6
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.2 ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN

Table 1.2.1.3 Soft Key Types in the Cycle Selection Screen


Name Function
A Cycle category Changes the cycle category to be displayed.
B Displays the cycle creation screen selected in the list.
1
[OK]
C Closes the cycle creation screen. 2
[Cancel] 3
4
5

7
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.3 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN

1.3

1.3 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE SELEC-


TION SCREEN
1 The measurement cycle selection screen can be displayed by any of the following
methods.

2 • Press the [Measure Cycle] soft key on the EDIT mode base screen.
For details on the EDIT mode base screen, see "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation
Screen OPERATORS MANUAL".
3 • Press the [Measure Cycle] soft key in the background edit screen.
• Press the [Measure Cycle] soft key on the MDI mode base screen when the NC is
4 in reset state.

Table 1.3 (a) Soft Keys on the Cycle Selection Screen


5 Soft keys in first tier Soft keys in second Displayed screen
tier
Machining Cycle Turning Create Turning Cycle
Milling Create Milling Cycle
Figure Cycle Turning Insert Threading Geometry
Milling Create Milling Cycle
Coordinate Turning Create Turning Coordinate Conversion
Conversion Cycle
Milling Create Milling Coordinate Conversion
Cycle
Measure Cycle Tool Measure Create Tool Measurement Cycle
Work Setup Create Work Setup Measurement Cycle
Part Check Create Part Check Measurement Cycle
Simple Measure Create Simple Measurement Cycle
Calibration Create Calibration Measurement Cycle

 • During automatic operation stop state, the cycle selection screen cannot be
displayed from the MDI mode base screen.
MEMO • The display items of soft keys in the second tier vary according to machine settings.

The following operations can be performed on the cycle selection screen.

Table 1.3 (b) Operations on the Cycle Selection Screen


Item Operation
Cycle category status Press the soft key that corresponds to the cycle category to
change the highlighted item.

8
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.3 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN

Item Operation
Cycle category tab Use <→>, <←>, and <TAB> to switch the displayed tab.
Cycle list • Use <↑> and <↓> to move the cursor up/down within the
cycle list.
• Use <PAGE UP> and <PAGE DOWN> to move the cursor
up/down the cycle list one page at a time.
1
• Use the [OK] soft key or <INPUT> to display the cycle
creation screen.
2
3
4
5

9
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.4 ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

1.4

1.4 ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION


SCREEN
1 The cycle creation screen allows you to enter data for the cycles.
The cycle creation screen is displayed after you select each function in the cycle

2 selection screen and press the [OK] soft key.

A
3
B
4 E

C
5 F

D
G

Fig. 1.4 Cycle Creation Screen

Table 1.4 Structure of the Cycle Creation Screen


Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the cycle creation screen.
B Input item name display Displays the input items for the condition selected in
the tab display.
C Input item display Displays the input items with a symbol.
For details on each item, see the appropriate
"MEASUREMENT CYCLE" chapter.
D Input item setting values Displays the input item setting values.
• For numerical values: Input or edit setting values
using the MDI keys.
• For character strings: Select setting values using the
soft keys. You cannot edit them.
E Optional Input Item Display A symbol (circle mark) will be displayed for input items
that can be omitted.
F Input item guidance window Displays the guidance window for the input item.
display
G Message display Displays guidance and warning messages.

10
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.4 ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

Name Function
H Soft key display Displays the soft keys required for operations.

1.4.1 Input Item Help Display 1


1.4.1

You can display the help corresponding to the displayed element input window as an
input operation guide.
<1> Press <HELP>. 2
The help window corresponding to the displayed element input window appears.
3
4
5

<2> Refer to the description of input items in the help window as necessary.
<3> To input items, press the [Switch Focus] soft key.
The focus moves to the element input window.
<4> Set values to the input items according to the description in the help.

11
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.4 ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

1.4.2 Input Item Setting Value Display in the Cycle Creation


Screen
1.4.2

The following text boxes to set the values for input items are displayed in the input
item setting value display.
1 • In editable text boxes, use the MDI keys to enter characters to set the values.
• In text boxes where characters cannot be entered, use the soft keys to make
2 selections to set the values.

3
4
5
Fig. 1.4.2 Input Item Setting Value Display

1.4.3 Input Item Guidance Window Display in the Cycle Cre-


ation Screen
1.4.3

If a guidance window exists for the input item to be set, the appropriate guidance
window will be displayed.
The symbol of the selected item (with the cursor in the text box) is highlighted.

Fig. 1.4.3 Display Example of the Guidance Window

1.4.4 Soft Key Display in the Cycle Creation Screen


1.4.4

Soft keys required for operations are displayed at the bottom of the cycle creation
screen.

A B C

Fig. 1.4.4 Soft Key Display in the Cycle Creation Screen

12
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.4 ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

Table 1.4.4 Soft Key Types in the Cycle Creation Screen


Name Function
A Names that Use these keys to change values for the input items.
correspond to the If a guidance window exists for the items for which you
items when the
value for the input
changed values, the guidance window will also be changed
accordingly.
1
item is selected
(Example: X-Axis, Y-
Axis) 2
B Creates G codes with the values set to the input item and
inserts/changes cycles for the measurement program being
edited. 3
[OK]
C Closes the cycle creation screen.
4
[Cancel]
5

13
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.5 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

1.5

1.5 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CRE-


ATION SCREEN
1 The cycle creation screen can be displayed by any of the following methods.
• Press the [OK] soft key on the cycle selection screen.
2 • Tap a cycle on the cycle selection screen.

3 The input items will be displayed for each of the input conditions.
When you enter values and press the [OK] soft key, G codes will be created with the
values applied to the input items and then inserted to the measurement program

4 being edited.

Table 1.5 Operations on the Cycle Creation Screen


5 Function Operation
Moving the tab Press the <→>, <←>, or <TAB> MDI key.
Moving the cursor between Press the <↑> or <↓> MDI key.
input items
Inputting a value Use the <Numeral>, <Alphabetic>, and <Character> MDI
keys.
Moving the value input position Press the <→> or <←> MDI key.
(cursor)
Selecting a value • Press an appropriate soft key for the selected item.
• Press the <Numeral> MDI key assigned to each soft
key.
Confirming a value (the cursor Press the < INPUT> MDI key.
moves to the next input item)
Deleting a value Press the <CAN> MDI key.
Inserting/modifying G code and • Press the <INSERT>, <ALT>, or <ALTER> MDI key.
closing the screen • Press the [OK] soft key.
Canceling • Press the <ESC> MDI key.
• Press the [Cancel] soft key.

 For details on displaying the cycle selection screen, see "1.3 OPERATIONS ON THE
CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN".
MEMO

14
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.5 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

1.5.1 Editing Cycles


1.5.1

Edit a created cycle.


<1> Switch to the EDIT mode base screen, background edit screen, or MDI mode
base screen.
<2> Select G code you want to edit and press <INPUT>.
1
The corresponding cycle creation screen appears.
2
 • The above operations can be performed on the MDI mode base screen only
MEMO
when the NC is in reset state.
3
4
5

15
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 1 CREATING MACHINING CYCLE
 1.5 OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5

16
2
MEASUREMENT 1

USING MDI MODE 2


3
4
5
In a case such as where there is only one part to be machined, measure it
manually.
6
2.1 MANUAL MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE .................................... 18
7
A

17
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 2 MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE
 2.1 MANUAL MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE

2.1

2.1 MANUAL MEASUREMENT USING MDI


MODE
3 In a case such as where there is only one part to be machined, execute a
measurement cycle at a position manually positioned for easy measurement. The

2 operation method is the same as for automatic measurement.

<1> Switch to JOG or HND mode.


3 <2> Move the probe to the measurement target.
<3> Switch to MDI mode.
4 <4> Set a workpiece coordinates system with the current position as the origin.
<5> Enter the set workpiece coordinates system in the MDI program.

5 <6> Select a cycle category and name in the cycle selection screen.
Select a geometry you want to measure.
<7> Input the information of the measurement target in the cycle creation screen.
Enter data, such as a geometry and measurement position, according to the
displayed guidance window. Also, set whether or not to apply the measurement
result, and specify its feedback destination.
<8> Press the [OK] soft key.
A measurement cycle with G + 4-digit number is output to the MDI program.
<9> Start the cycle.
When measurement is finished, the measurement result is output to the feedback
destination specified in the cycle creation screen.

Fig. 2.1 Manual Measurement Using MDI Mode

• For details about NC operation, see "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen
OPERATORS MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1).
 • For details on cycle selection and cycle input, see "1 CREATING MACHINING
CYCLE".
MEMO
• If cycle output is 512 bytes or more in MDI mode, the message "Memory is full."
appears.

18
3
QUICK MANUAL 1

MEASUREMENT 2
3
4
5
You can easily measure workpiece coordinates manually.

3.1 OPERATION FLOW/SCREEN LAYOUT................................................ 20


6
3.2 MENU SCREEN ..................................................................................... 22
3.3
3.4
MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT SCREEN................................... 25
MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES .......................................... 28
7
3.5 EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN.................................................. 68
3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN........................ 71 A

19
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.1 OPERATION FLOW/SCREEN LAYOUT

3.1

3.1 OPERATION FLOW/SCREEN LAYOUT


Measure workpiece coordinates or a tool according to the following operation flow:

5 Operation screen
Start the measurement application (measurements on machine)
Home screen
from the home screen.
2
Select the measurement target (workpiece, tool, etc.).

3 Select the measurement description


Menu screen

(face, outside diameter, inside diameter, etc.).

Move the probe or tool to the measurement start position


manually.
Measurement condition
input screen
Enter the measurement conditions.
(A program is generated internally.)

Perform measurement (start the cycle). Execute Measurement


screen

Apply and confirm the measurement result. Measurement result


confirmation screen

Fig. 3.1 (a) Operation Flow

The displayed contents on the measurement condition input screen or measurement


result confirmation screen vary depending on the measurement target selected on
the menu screen.

 Screen transition
The screen switches as follows:

Home Menu Measurement Execute Measurement


screen screen condition measurement result confir-
input screen screen mation screen

: Switch manually
Tool change
screen : Switch automatically

Fig. 3.1 (b) Screen transition

20
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.1 OPERATION FLOW/SCREEN LAYOUT

• Pressing the home button on each screen of the measurement application returns
to the home screen.

 • Starting the measurement application from the home screen displays the screen
last displayed on the measurement application.
MEMO • Changing the path while displaying any other screen than the home screen
switches to the menu screen. Then, returning to the previous path displays the
2
menu screen again.

2
 Home screen
When you select [MEASUREMENTS ON MACHINE] on the home screen, the
3
measurement application starts.

Fig. 3.1 (c) Home screen

21
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.2 MENU SCREEN

3.2

3.2 MENU SCREEN


The menu screen allows you to select the measurement target and the motion.

5 A

2 B C

Fig. 3.2 (a) Menu screen

Table 3.2 (a) Layout of the Menu Screen


Name Function
A Guidance area Displays operation instructions.
B Measurement Select the measurement target.
target area
C Motion area Displays the list of measurement motions according to the selected
measurement target.
If items do not fit into the display area, the scroll bar appears.
D Detailed Displays the detailed information of the selected motion.
information area
E Message area Displays a warning message.

 Soft keys displayed on the menu screen


Soft keys required for operation are displayed at the bottom of the menu screen.

A
Fig. 3.2 (b) Soft keys displayed on the menu screen

22
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.2 MENU SCREEN

Table 3.2 (b) Types of Soft Keys on the Menu Screen


Name Function
A • When the measurement target is selected:
Selects the first of the motions according to the selected
measurement target. 2
• When the motion is selected:
[Select] Displays the measurement condition input screen according to the
selected motion. 2
 How to operate soft keys 3
<1> Use one of the following methods to select the measurement target from the
measurement target area:
Select the measurement target with the cursor key and press the [Select] soft
key.
For the touch panel: Touch the icon of the measurement target.
<2> Use one of the following methods to select the motion from the motion area:
Select the motion with the cursor key and press the [Select] soft key.
For the touch panel: Touch the icon of the motion.
The measurement condition input screen appears.

 Measurement targets
The following measurement targets are displayed in the measurement target area:

Table 3.2 (c) Measurement Target Items


Display Measurement target name Measurement target
order
1 Workpiece Measurement Workpiece
2 Tool Measure Tool
3 Machine Calibration Rotation Axis Position
4 Measurement Sensor Calibration Measurement sensor

23
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.2 MENU SCREEN

 Motions
The following motions are displayed in the measurement target area according to the
measurement target:
• Measurement motion for "Workpiece Measurement"
5 Table 3.2 (d) Measurement Motion for "Workpiece Measurement"
Display Motion name Shown/hidden
2 order
1 Face Depends on the parameter setting.
2 Outer Diameter Circle For details on the settings, contact the MTB.
3 3 Inner Diameter Circle
4 Outer Width
5 Inner Width
6 Outer Corner
7 Inner Corner
8 Workpiece Slant

• Measurement motion for "Tool Measure"


Table 3.2 (e) Measurement Motion for "Tool Measure"
Display Motion name Shown/hidden
order
1 Milling Tool Depends on the parameter setting.
2 Turning Tool For details on the settings, contact the MTB.

• Measurement motion for "Machine Calibration"


Table 3.2 (f) Measurement Motion for "Machine Calibration"
Display Motion name Shown/hidden
order
1 Rotation Axis Position See "3.4.3.1 Rotation axis position".

• Measurement motion for "Measurement Sensor Calibration"


Table 3.2 (g) Measurement Motion for "Measurement Sensor Calibration"
Display Motion name Shown/hidden
order
1 Probe Length Calibration Depends on the parameter setting.
2 Stylus Ball Diameter Calibration For details on the settings, contact the MTB.

3 Stylus Offsets Calibration-A

24
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.3 MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT SCREEN

3.3

3.3 MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT


SCREEN
The measurement condition input screen allows you to select an item and enter the 2
measurement conditions.

A 2
B

D
3
C

Fig. 3.3 (a) Measurement condition input screen

Table 3.3 (a) Layout of the Measurement Condition Input Screen


Name Function
A Step display area Highlights the current operation ("Input Measurement
Condition" on this screen).
B Guidance area Displays operation instructions.
C Input item area Enter motion conditions.
The input items vary depending on the motion selected on the
menu screen.
D Guidance map area Displays a guidance map according to the selected input item.
E Message area Displays a guidance message or warning message according
to the selected input item or operation.

25
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.3 MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT SCREEN

 Soft keys displayed on the measurement condition input screen


Soft keys required for operation are displayed at the bottom of the measurement
condition input screen.

5
2 A B C

Fig. 3.3 (b) Soft keys displayed on the measurement condition input screen

3
Table 3.3 (b) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Condition Input Screen
Name Function
A Switches to the Tool Change Window.
See "3.3.1 Tool Change Window".

[Tool Change]
B Switches to the Execute Measurement screen.

[Next]
C Returns to the menu screen.

[Close]

 How to operate soft keys


Use one of the following methods to select an input item from the input item area:
• Select an input item with the cursor key and press the [Select] soft key.
• For the touch panel: Touch an input item.

 •• An input item is entered in an edit box or selected from a combo box.


"*" is displayed at the end of an edit box for an optional item.
MEMO

26
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.3 MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT SCREEN

3.3.1 Tool Change Window


3.3.1

The Tool Change Window allows you to change a tool used for measurement.
The operations are the same as for the Tool Change Window for the tool slide.

2
2
3

Fig. 3.3.1 Tool Change Window

27
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4

3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCE-


DURES
5 3.4.1

This section describes a program generated for each motion on the Execute
Measurement screen.
2
3.4.1 Workpiece Measurement
3 3.4.1.1 Face
Measure the face and set workpiece coordinates so that the face is positioned at the
3.4.1.1

specified coordinates.
Position the probe above the measurement surface in the measurement direction.
Table 3.4.1.1 (a) Input Items for the Face
Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to use,
Direction parameter setting. one attached to the X-axis
direction or one attached
to the Z-axis direction.
2 Measurement Always shown (*1) Direction in which the
Direc. probe is moved closer
3 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter setting. when multiple probes are
set on the machine.
4 Setting Dest. Always shown G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate
G57/ offset number to which the
G58/G59/G54.1P measurement result is set
5 Work Always shown Coordinates Absolute coordinates of
Coord.Value the measurement position
after measurement
(measurement direction
axis)

*1: Values that can be selected in "Measurement Direc." vary as follows


depending on the combination of the parameter setting and "Probe Direction".
• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis/Y-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Y-axis/Z-axis
• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Z-axis

• For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

28
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

 Motion
• For measurement in the probe axis direction
1) Perform first measurement from the measurement start position within the range (axis
direction measurement distance (cycle) + axis direction go past amount - stylus ball radius
r). 2
2) Move back at a rapid traverse speed only by the axis direction return amount (first) and
perform second measurement from that position within the range (return amount + go past
amount). 2
3) Move back at a rapid traverse speed only by the axis direction return amount (second).
3
Measurement start position

Radius
Positioning direction
measurement Measurement
distance range

Go past amount

Z
Measurement
surface

Fig. 3.4.1.1 (a) Motion for the Probe Axis Direction

• For measurement in the stylus ball radius direction of the probe


1) Perform first measurement from the measurement start position within the range (radius
direction measurement distance (cycle) + radius direction go past amount).

2) Move back at a rapid traverse speed only by the radius direction return amount (second)
and perform second measurement from that position within the range (return amount + go
past amount).

29
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3) Move back at a rapid traverse speed only by the radius direction return amount (second).

Measurement range
Radius direction
measurement distance

5 Go past amount - Stylus ball radius


Measurement
start position
Z
2 Measurement
surface
Positioning

3 X

Fig. 3.4.1.1 (b) Motion for the Stylus Ball Radius Direction of the Probe


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

3.4.1.2 Outer diameter circle


Measure the outer diameter circle and set workpiece coordinates so that the center
3.4.1.2

of the circle is positioned at the specified coordinates.


Position the probe above the center of the circle.
Table 3.4.1.2 Input Items for the Outer Diameter Circle
Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to
parameter setting. use, one attached to
the X-axis direction or
one attached to the Z-
axis direction.
2 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to
Cond. parameter setting. use when multiple
probes are set on the
machine.
3 Diameter Always shown Numerical value Diameter of the circle
to be measured

30
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


4 Aproch Distance Depends on the Numerical value Z-direction travel
parameter setting. distance from the
current position to the
measurement point.
Depending on the 2
parameter setting, the
input item is not
displayed, and "Axis
Direction
2
Measurement
Distance (Cycle)" is
used instead.
3
5 Measurement Always shown 1 to 4 Enter the number of
Point measurement points
in a numerical value.
6 Spindle Shown when the Enable/Disable Set whether to
Orientation optional function perform spindle
"Spindle Orientation" orientation for each
is enabled measurement point.
7 Setting Dest. Always shown G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate
G57/ offset number to which
G58/G59/G54.1P the measurement
result is set
8 Work Coord.Value Shown when "Probe Numerical value Absolute coordinates
X Direction" is set to Z of the measurement
9 Work Coord.Value Always shown Numerical value position after
Y measurement

10 Work Coord.Value Shown when "Probe Numerical value


Z Direction" is set to X

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
• For measurement in the probe axis direction: Z-axis
1) Move in rapid traverse from the current position to the position (current position + (outer
diameter / 2 +  + r)) in the X-axis direction.

2) Move at the moving speed fb to the position specified in "Aproch Distance" in the -Z-axis
direction.

3) If "Spindle Orientation" is set to "Enable", perform spindle orientation.

4) Perform measurement at the moving speed f within the range ( + ). (First measurement)

31
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

5) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the speed specified in "Moving Meas.Speed" within the range ( + ). (Second
measurement)

6) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and move the Z-axis in rapid traverse to the

5 approach point (measurement start position + approach distance) in the Z-axis direction.

7) Move at a rapid traverse speed to the position before measurement and move at the
moving speed fa to the distance (outer diameter / 2 +  + r) in the -X-axis direction.
2 8) Perform the same measurement for the -X-axis direction and ±Y-axis direction.

3 • f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• fa: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting". However, a rapid traverse speed is used instead depending on the
parameter setting.
• fb: Value of "Axis Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"

 • : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement


conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
MEMO • : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)

Position before measurement


(Position to the center of the outer diameter circle)

Current coordinate X + (Diameter Radius direction


+ Stylus ball diameter) / 2 measurement distance
Z Radius direction go Approach distance
past amount

X
Measurement Measurement range
surface
Measurement start position

Fig. 3.4.1.2 Motion for the Probe Axis Direction: Z-axis

32
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• When "Measurement Point" is 1, measurement is performed only for the +X-axis.


The ±X-axis and +Y-axis are additionally measured when "Measurement Point" is 2

 and 3, respectively.
Depending on the parameter setting, however, the +Y-axis, -Y-axis, +X-axis, and -
MEMO X-axis are additionally measured when "Measurement Point" is 1, 2, 3, and 4,
respectively. When "Probe Direction" is set to X, replace X with Y, Y with Z, and Z
2
with X in the above items 1 to 8.

2
• After all the measurement points are measured with the first measurement
conditions, second measurement is performed. You cannot specify any other 3

NOTE
motion.
• The circle measurement direction is parallel to the basic axis. You cannot specify
any other measurement direction.
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

3.4.1.3 Inner diameter circle


Measure the inner diameter circle and set workpiece coordinates so that the center of
3.4.1.3

the circle is positioned at the specified coordinates.


Position the probe to the center of the circle.
Table 3.4.1.3 Input Items for the Inner Diameter Circle
Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to
parameter setting. use, one attached to
the X-axis direction or
one attached to the Z-
axis direction.
2 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to
Cond. parameter setting. use when multiple
probes are set on the
machine.
3 Diameter Always shown Numerical value Diameter of the circle
to be measured
4 Measurement Always shown 1 to 4 Enter the number of
Point measurement points
in a numerical value.
5 Spindle Shown when the Enable/Disable Set whether to
Orientation optional function perform spindle
"Spindle Orientation" orientation for each
is enabled measurement point.
6 Setting Dest. Always shown G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate
G57/ offset number to which
G58/G59/G54.1P the measurement
result is set

33
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


7 Work Coord.Value Shown when "Probe Numerical value Absolute coordinates
X Direction" is set to Z of the measurement
8 Work Coord.Value Always shown Numerical value position after
measurement
5 9
Y
Work Coord.Value Shown when "Probe Numerical value
Z Direction" is set to X

2
 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.
3 MEMO

 Motion
• For measurement in the probe axis direction: Z-axis
1) Move in rapid traverse from the positioned position to the position (current position + (inner
diameter / 2 -  - r)) in the X-axis direction.

2) If "Spindle Orientation" is set to "Enable", perform spindle orientation.

3) Perform measurement from the position in step 1) at the moving speed f within the range
( + ). (First measurement)

4) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the speed specified in "Moving Meas.Speed" within the range ( + ). (Second
measurement)

5) Move back in rapid traverse by , move in rapid traverse to the X-axis at the position
before measurement, and move at the moving speed fa to the distance (inner diameter / 2
-  - r) in the -X-axis direction.

6) Perform the same measurement for the -X-axis direction and ±Y-axis direction.

34
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• fa: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting". However, a rapid traverse speed is used instead depending on the
2
parameter setting.
• : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement
conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
2
 • : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
MEMO
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting" 3
• : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)

Radius direction Radius direction


measurement distance go past amount

Position before measurement


(Position to the center of the
inner diameter circle)
Measurement
position
Z

Measurement start position


X

Fig. 3.4.1.3 Motion for the Probe Axis Direction: Z-axis

• When "Measurement Point" is 1, measurement is performed only for the +X-axis.


The ±X-axis and +Y-axis are additionally measured when "Measurement Point" is 2
and 3, respectively.
 • Depending on the parameter setting, however, the +Y-axis, -Y-axis, +X-axis, and -
X-axis are additionally measured when "Measurement Point" is 1, 2, 3, and 4,
MEMO
respectively.
• When "Probe Direction" is set to X, replace X with Y, Y with Z, and Z with X in the
above items 1 to 6.

35
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• After all the measurement points are measured with the first measurement
conditions, second measurement is performed. You cannot specify any other

 motion.
• The circle measurement direction is parallel to the basic axis. You cannot specify
5
NOTE
any other measurement direction.
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

2
3.4.1.4 Outer width
3 3.4.1.4

Measure the rib width and set workpiece coordinates so that the center of the rib is
positioned at the specified coordinates.
Position the probe above the center of the rib.
Table 3.4.1.4 (a) Input Items for the Outer Width
Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to use,
parameter setting. one attached to the X-axis
direction or one attached to
the Z-axis direction.
2 Measurement Always shown (*1) Direction in which the probe
Direc. is moved closer
3 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter setting. when multiple probes are
set on the machine.
4 Width Always shown Numerical value Width of the protrusion (rib)
to be measured
5 Aproch Distance Depends on the Numerical value Z-direction travel distance
parameter setting. from the current position to
the measurement point.
Depending on the
parameter setting, the input
item is not displayed, and
"Axis Direction
Measurement Distance
(Cycle)" is used instead.
6 Setting Dest. Always shown G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate offset
G57/ number to which the
G58/G59/G54.1P measurement result is set
7 Work Always shown Numerical value Absolute coordinates of the
Coord.Value measurement position after
measurement
(measurement direction
axis)

*1: Values that can be selected in "Measurement Direc." vary as follows


depending on the combination of the parameter setting and "Probe Direction".

36
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis/Y-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Y-axis/Z-axis


• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Z-axis

• For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


2
MEMO

 Motion 2
• For measurement in the probe axis direction: Z-axis
1) If measurement is performed in the X-axis direction, move in rapid traverse from the 3
current position to the position (current position + (width / 2 +  + r)) in the X-axis direction.
If measurement is performed in the Y-axis direction, similarly move in rapid traverse from
the current position to the position (current position + (width / 2 +  + r)) in the Y-axis
direction.

2) Move at the moving speed fb to the position specified in "Aproch Distance" in the -Z-axis
direction and perform measurement from that position at the moving speed f within the
range ( + ). (First measurement)

3) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the speed specified in "Moving Meas.Speed" within the range ( + ). (Second
measurement)

4) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and move the Z-axis in rapid traverse to the
approach point ("Height of Meas.Pt." + "Approach Distance") in the Z-axis direction.

5) Move at a rapid traverse speed to the center coordinates and move at the moving speed fa
to the approach point on the - side. Then, perform the same measurement for the -X-axis
(-Y-axis) direction.

37
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• fa: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the
5 measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting" However, a rapid traverse speed is used instead depending on the
parameter setting.

2 • fb: Value of "Axis Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"

3  • : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement


conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
MEMO • : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)

Z
Position before measurement

Current coordinate X + (Width + Radius direction


Stylus ball diameter) / 2 measurement distance
X Radius direction go past amount Approach distance

Measurement surface Measurement range


Measurement start position

Fig. 3.4.1.4 Motion for the Probe Axis Direction: Z-axis

 • When measurement is performed in the Y-axis direction or "Probe Direction" is set


to X, replace X with Y, Y with Z, and Z with X in the above items 1 to 5.
MEMO


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

38
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4.1.5 Inner width


Measure the groove inner width and set workpiece coordinates so that the center of
the groove is positioned at the specified coordinates. Position the probe to the center
of the groove.
3.4.1.5

Table 3.4.1.5 (a) Input Items for the Inner Width 2


Item name Shown/ Input value Description
hidden
1 Probe Depends on Z/X Select which probe to use, one 2
Direction the parameter attached to the X-axis direction or
setting. one attached to the Z-axis direction.
2 Measurement Always (*1) Direction in which the probe is
3
Direc. shown moved closer
3 Measurement Depends on Condition number Select which probe to use when
Cond. the parameter multiple probes are set on the
setting. machine.
4 Width Always Numerical value Width of the groove to be measured
shown
5 Setting Dest. Always G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate offset number
shown G57/ to which the measurement result is
G58/G59/G54.1P set
6 Work Always Numerical value Absolute coordinates of the
Coord.Value shown measurement position after
measurement (measurement
direction axis)

*1: Values that can be selected in "Measurement Direc." vary as follows


depending on the combination of the parameter setting and "Probe Direction".
• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis/Y-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Y-axis/Z-axis
• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Z-axis

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
• For measurement in the probe axis direction: Z-axis
1) If measurement is performed in the X-axis direction, move in rapid traverse from the
current position to the position (current position + (width / 2 -  - r)) in the X-axis direction.
If measurement is performed in the Y-axis direction, similarly move in rapid traverse from
the current position to the position (current position + (width / 2 -  - r)) in the Y-axis
direction.

2) Perform measurement at the moving speed f within the range ( + ) in the measurement
axis direction. (First measurement)

39
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the speed specified in "Moving Meas.Speed" within the range ( + ). (Second
measurement)

4) Move in rapid traverse to the positioned position and move at the moving speed fa to the

5 distance (width / 2 -  - r) in the - direction of the measurement axis.

5) Perform the same measurement for the - direction of the measurement axis.

2 • f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
3 • fa: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting". However, a rapid traverse speed is used instead depending on the
parameter setting.
• : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement
conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
 • : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
MEMO
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)

Radius direction Radius direction


measurement distance go past amount

Position before measurement


(Position to the center of the
inner width)
Measurement position
Z

Measurement start position


X

Fig. 3.4.1.5 Motion for the Probe Axis Direction: Z-axis

 • When "Probe Direction" is set to X, replace X with Y, Y with Z, and Z with X in the
above items 1 to 5.
MEMO


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

40
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4.1.6 Outer corner


Measure four points and set workpiece coordinates so that the intersection of the line
through the first and second points and the line through the third and fourth points is
positioned at the specified coordinates. Position the probe the radius direction
measurement distance away from the corner.
3.4.1.6

Table 3.4.1.6 (a) Input Items for the Outer Corner


2
Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to use, one 2
parameter setting. attached to the X-axis direction
or one attached to the Z-axis
direction. 3
2 Measurement Depends on the Condition Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter setting. number when multiple probes are set
on the machine.
3 Aproch Distance Depends on the Numerical value Z-direction travel distance
parameter setting. from the current position to the
measurement point.
Depending on the parameter
setting, the input item is not
displayed, and "Axis Direction
Measurement Distance
(Cycle)" is used instead.
4 Dist. b/w meas. Always shown Numerical value Distance from the positioned
strt. pt. & 1st position to the 1st point
meas. strt. pt. measurement start position.
If omitted, the value set in the
MTB setting file is applied. If
no value is set in the file, 20.0
mm (input in millimeters) or 1.0
inch (input in inches) is
applied.
5 Dist. b/w 1st & Always shown Numerical value Distance between the 1st and
2nd 2nd point measurement start
measurement positions
start pt.
6 Dist. b/w meas. Always shown Numerical value Distance from the positioned
strt. pt. & 3rd position to the 3rd point
meas. strt. pt. measurement start position.
If omitted, the value set in the
MTB setting file is applied. If
no value is set in the file, 20.0
mm (input in millimeters) or 1.0
inch (input in inches) is
applied.
7 Dist. b/w 3rd & Always shown Numerical value Distance between the 3rd and
4th 4th point measurement start
measurement positions
start pt.

41
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


8 Comb. of 1st & Always shown (*1) Combination of two
3rd measurement directions to
measurement measure the corner point
direc.
5 9 Setting Dest. Always shown G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate offset
G57/ number to which the
G58/G59/ measurement result is set
2 G54.1P
10 Work Shown when Numerical value Absolute coordinates of the

3 Coord.Value X "Probe Direction" is


set to Z
measurement position after
measurement
11 Work Always shown Numerical value
Coord.Value Y
12 Work Shown when Numerical value
Coord.Value Z "Probe Direction" is
set to X

*1: Values that can be selected in "Comb. of 1st & 3rd measurement direc." vary
as follows depending on the probe axis direction.

Table 3.4.1.6 (b) Values That Can Be Selected in "Comb. of 1st & 3rd measurement
direc."
Probe axis direction Input value
Z-axis 1pt: +X, 3pt: +Y/1pt: +X, 3pt: -Y/1pt: -X, 3pt: +Y/1pt: -X, 3pt: -Y/
1pt: +Y, 3pt: +X/1pt: +Y, 3pt: -X/1pt: -Y, 3pt: +X/1pt: -Y, 3pt: -X
X-axis 1pt: +Y, 3pt: +Z/1pt: +Y, 3pt: -Z/1pt: -Y, 3pt: +Z/1pt: -Y, 3pt: -Z/1pt:
+Z, 3pt: +Y/1pt: +Z, 3pt: -Y/1pt: -Z, 3pt: +Y/1pt: -Z, 3pt: -Y

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
1) Move in rapid traverse from the current position to the 1st point measurement start
position. After the axis specified in "Probe Direction" moves to the measurement height,
perform measurement in the 1st point measurement direction.

2) Perform measurement for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th points.

42
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

4th point start position


Distance between the 3rd and 4th
point measurement start positions
Distance between the 1st and 2nd
point measurement start positions
3rd point start position
Distance between the measurement
Corner
coordinates
2
start position and the 3rd point
measurement start position

Y Distance between the


measurement start position
2
and the 1st point
measurement start position

X 3
Measurement 1st point start 2nd point start
start position position position

Fig. 3.4.1.6 Motion for the Outer Corner


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

3.4.1.7 Inner corner


Measure four points and set workpiece coordinates so that the intersection of the line
through the first and second points and the line through the third and fourth points is
positioned at the specified coordinates. Position the probe only the radius direction
measurement distance away from the corner.
3.4.1.7

Table 3.4.1.7 (a) Input Items for the Inner Corner


Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to
parameter setting. use, one attached to the
X-axis direction or one
attached to the Z-axis
direction.
2 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to
Cond. parameter setting. use when multiple probes
are set on the machine.
3 Dist. b/w 1st & 2nd Always shown Numerical value Distance between the 1st
measurement start and 2nd point
pt. measurement start
positions
4 Dist. b/w 3rd & 4th Always shown Numerical value Distance between the 3rd
measurement start and 4th point
pt. measurement start
positions

43
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


5 Comb. of 1st & 3rd Always shown (*1) Combination of two
measurement measurement directions
direc. to measure the corner
point
5 6 Setting Dest. Always shown G54/G55/G56/ Workpiece coordinate
G57/ offset number to which
G58/G59/G54.1P the measurement result
2 is set
7 Work Coord.Value Shown when Numerical value Absolute coordinates of

3 X "Probe Direction" is
set to Z
the measurement
position after
8 Work Coord.Value Always shown Numerical value measurement
Y
9 Work Coord.Value Shown when Numerical value
Z "Probe Direction" is
set to X

*1: Values that can be selected in "Comb. of 1st & 3rd measurement direc." vary
as follows depending on the probe axis direction.

Table 3.4.1.7 (b) Values That Can Be Selected in "Comb. of 1st & 3rd measurement
direc."

Probe axis direction Input value


Z-axis 1pt: +X, 3pt: +Y/1pt: +X, 3pt: -Y/1pt: -X, 3pt: +Y/1pt: -X, 3pt: -Y/
1pt: +Y, 3pt: +X/1pt: +Y, 3pt: -X/1pt: -Y, 3pt: +X/1pt: -Y, 3pt: -X
X-axis 1pt: +Y, 3pt: +Z/1pt: +Y, 3pt: -Z/1pt: -Y, 3pt: +Z/1pt: -Y, 3pt: -Z/1pt:
+Z, 3pt: +Y/1pt: +Z, 3pt: -Y/1pt: -Z, 3pt: +Y/1pt: -Z, 3pt: -Y

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
1) Move in rapid traverse from the current position to the 1st point measurement start
position. After the axis specified in "Probe Direction" moves to the measurement height,
perform measurement in the 1st point measurement direction.

2) Perform measurement for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th points.

44
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

4th point start position

Measurement start position

2
Distance between (1st point start position, 3rd
the 3rd and 4th point point start position)
measurement start
positions

2nd point start position 2


Y

Corner
coordinates 3
X Distance between the 1st and 2nd
point measurement start positions

Fig. 3.4.1.7 Motion for the Inner Corner


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

45
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4.1.8 Workpiece slant


Calculate the workpiece slant between two measured points to find the calculated
angle.
Teach the 1st and 2nd point measurement start positions.

5  Teaching
<1> On the measurement condition input screen, press the [Teaching] soft key.
2
3

The Teaching window appears.

46
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

<2> Position the probe to the first measurement position and press the [Next] soft
key.
The first measurement position is stored as the 2nd point measurement start
position.

2
2
3

 • Pressing the [Close] soft key returns to the measurement condition input
screen without storing the position.
MEMO

47
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

<3> Position the probe to the second measurement position and press the [OK] soft
key.
The second measurement position is stored as the 1st point measurement start
position.

5
2
3

• Pressing the [Back] soft key returns to the teaching operation for the first
 measurement position without storing the position.
• Pressing the [Close] soft key returns to the measurement condition input
MEMO
screen without storing the position.

3.4.1.8

Table 3.4.1.8 (a) Input Items for the Workpiece Slant


Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to
parameter setting. use, one attached to the
X-axis direction or one
attached to the Z-axis
direction.
2 Measurement Always shown (*1) Direction in which the
Direc. probe is moved closer
3 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to
Cond. parameter setting. use when multiple probes
are set on the machine.
4 Setting Macro Var. Always shown P code macro P code macro variable
variable to which number to which the
the measured measurement result is
angle is set set. If you do not set this
item, no entry is required.

48
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


5 Return Amount Depends on the Numerical value Return amount to avoid
parameter setting. any protrusion (obstacle)
between the 1st and 2nd
point measurement
positions. If there is no 2
protrusion, no entry is
required.
2
*1: Values that can be selected in "Measurement Direc." vary as follows
depending on the combination of the parameter setting and "Probe Direction".
• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis/Y-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Y-axis/Z-axis 3
• "Probe Direction" Z: X-axis, "Probe Direction" X: Z-axis

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
• For measurement in the probe axis direction: Z-axis
1) Measure at the moving speed f from the 1st point measurement start position within the
range ( +  - r). (First measurement)

2) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the specified speed fb within the range ( + ). (Second measurement)

3) Move the two axes X and Y simultaneously to the positions specified in "2nd Meas.Strt
Pt.X" and "2nd Meas.Strt Pt.Y", respectively.

4) Like the 1st point, perform 2nd point measurement.

5) Move back by  in the Z-axis direction.

49
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• fb: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (2nd)" in the
5 measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement

2 conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"


• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the

 measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data

3 Setting"
MEMO • : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)
• When "Probe Direction" is set to X, replace X with Y, Y with Z, and Z with X in the
above items 1 to 5.

X
Angle to measure

1st point start position 2nd point start position


(Position specified in teaching) (Position specified in teaching)

Fig. 3.4.1.8 Motion for the Workpiece Slant


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

50
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4.2 Tool Measurement


3.4.2

3.4.2.1 Milling tool


Measure the tool offset.
3.4.2.1

Position the tool above the touch sensor.


Also, make sure that there is no obstacle between the tool and the touch sensor.
2
Table 3.4.2.1 Input Items for the Milling Tool
Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
2
1 Tool Installation Always shown Z/X Direction in which the
Direction tool is installed
3
2 Measurement Always shown +X/-X/+Y/-Y/ Direction in which
Direc. +Z/-Z measurement is
performed
3 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to
Cond. parameter setting. use when multiple probes
are set on the machine.
4 Clearance Always shown Numerical value Distance to move to the
touch sensor at the
moving speed during
measurement
5 Tool Rotation Cmd Always shown No Rot/Forward/ Specify whether to rotate
Reverse the tool during
measurement and
specify the rotation
direction when it rotates.
6 Tool Rotation Shown when "Tool Numerical value Tool rotation speed when
Speed Rotation Cmd" is measurement is
"Forward" or performed by rotating the
"Reverse" tool
7 Compensation No. Always shown Numerical value Tool offset amount
number to which the
measurement result is
set
8 Setting Dest. Always shown H-Geom/H-Wear/ Tool offset type to which
D-Geom/D-Wear the measurement result
is set

• For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
1) Measure at the moving speed f from the position positioned before measurement within
the range (clearance + ) in the measurement direction. (First measurement)

51
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

2) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the specified speed f within the range ( + ). (Second measurement)

3) Move at a rapid traverse speed by  in the reverse direction of measurement.

5 • f: Value of "Feedrate (1st)" in the measurement conditions for the group number
specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
• : Value of "Escaping Distance (1st)" in the measurement conditions for the group

2  number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"


• : Value of "Go Past Amount" in the measurement conditions for the group number
MEMO
specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
• : Value of "Escaping Distance (2nd)" in the measurement conditions for the group
3 number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"

Measurement start position


(Position for measurement
with the touch sensor)

Go past amount Clearance


Clearance

Go past amount

Measurement start position


(Position for measurement
with the touch sensor)

For measurement in the tool length For measurement in the tool radius
direction direction

Fig. 3.4.2.1 Motion for the Milling Tool


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

3.4.2.2 Turning tool


Set the tool offset.
3.4.2.2

Position the tool above the touch sensor.


Also, make sure that there is no obstacle between the tool and the touch sensor.

Table 3.4.2.2 Input Items for the Turning Tool

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


1 Tool Installation Always shown Z/X Direction in which the tool
Direction is installed

52
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


2 Measurement Always shown For "Tool Installation Direction in which
Direc. Direction": Z measurement is
+X/-X/-Z performed
For "Tool Installation
Direction": X 2
-X/+Z/-Z
3 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter when multiple probes are 2
setting. set on the machine.
4 Clearance Always shown Numerical value Distance to move to the
touch sensor at the 3
moving speed during
measurement
5 Compensation Always shown Numerical value Tool offset amount
No. number to which the
measurement result is set
6 Setting Dest. Always shown X-Geom/X-Wear/ Tool offset type to which
Z-Geom/Z-Wear the measurement result is
set

• For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
1) Measure at the moving speed f from the position positioned before measurement within
the range (clearance + ) in the measurement direction. (First measurement)

2) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  and perform measurement from that position at
the specified speed f within the range ( + ). (Second measurement)

3) Move at a rapid traverse speed by  in the reverse direction of measurement.

• f: Value of "Feedrate (1st)" in the measurement conditions for the group number
specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
• : Value of "Escaping Distance (1st)" in the measurement conditions for the group
 number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
• : Value of "Go Past Amount" in the measurement conditions for the group number
MEMO
specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
• : Value of "Escaping Distance (2nd)" in the measurement conditions for the group
number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"

53
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

5 Measurement start position


(Position for measurement with
the touch sensor)
2
3
Clearance

Go past amount

Fig. 3.4.2.2 Motion for the Turning Tool


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

54
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4.3 Machine Calibration


3.4.3

3.4.3.1 Rotation axis position


3.4.3.1

 Measurement procedure 2
<1> On the home screen, select [MEASUREMENTS ON MACHINE].
2
3

55
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

<2> On the menu screen, select [Machine Calibration].


If the probe selection screen appears, proceed to step <3>.
If it does not appear, skip to step <6>.

5
2
3

<3> Enter the probe tool number according to the instructions on the screen and
press the <INPUT> key.

56
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

<4> Start the cycle according to the instructions on the screen.


The tool at the spindle position is replaced with the touch probe.
When the tool change signal changes from ON to OFF after replacement, the
datum sphere installation screen appears.
If the tool change signal is not used, the datum sphere installation screen does
not appear automatically. 2
<5> Press the [Skip] soft key.
The datum sphere installation screen appears. 2
<6> Install the datum sphere on the table according to the instructions on the
screen.
<7> Press the [Next] soft key.
3
The approach probe screen appears.

<8> Switch to JOG or HANDLE mode and move the touch probe closer to the
datum sphere.
Move the touch probe to a position where it makes contact with the datum
sphere when it moves in the Z-axis direction.

57
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

<9> Press the [Next] soft key.


The Execute Measurement screen appears.

5
2
3

<10>Perform measurement.
Switch to MDI mode and execute the cycle.

58
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

<11>Wait until the measurement is completed.


The progress is displayed while the measurement is in progress.

2
2
3

When the measurement is completed, the Confirm Result screen appears.


The displayed contents vary depending on the machine type.

 •• Pressing the [Apply] soft key applies the measurement result to the parameter.
If the [Apply] soft key is not displayed due to the setting, the measurement result is
MEMO applied to the parameter when the measurement is complete.

59
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

5
2
3

Fig. 3.4.3.1 (a) Measurement Result Confirmation Screen (Machine Type: Table
Rotation Type)

Fig. 3.4.3.1 (b) Measurement Result Confirmation Screen (Machine Type: Tool
Rotation Type)

60
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

2
2
3

Fig. 3.4.3.1 (c) Measurement Result Confirmation Screen (Machine Type: Mixed
Type)

3.4.4 Measurement Sensor Calibration


3.4.4

3.4.4.1 Probe length


Measure the probe length.
3.4.4.1

Position the probe above the reference workpiece in the measurement direction.

Table 3.4.4.1 Input Items for the Probe Length


Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to use,
parameter one attached to the X-axis
setting. direction or one attached
to the Z-axis direction.
2 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter when multiple probes are
setting. set on the machine.

61
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


3 Refer.Work Depends on the Numerical value Height of the reference
Height parameter workpiece with which the
setting. probe makes contact.
Whether this item is
5 displayed or not is
determined as follows
depending on the
2 parameter setting:
• When it is set to use the
machine coordinates on
3 which the reference
workpiece is placed:
Shown
• When it is set to use the
workpiece coordinates
set on the top surface of
the reference
workpiece: Not shown

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
Before measurement, position the measuring probe about the axis direction
measurement distance (cycle) above from the reference workpiece.
When measurement starts, the following motion is performed:
1) Perform measurement from the position positioned before measurement at the moving
speed f within the range (axis direction measurement distance (cycle) + ). (First
measurement)

2) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  in the probe axis direction and perform
measurement from that position at the specified moving speed fb within the range ( + ).
(Second measurement)

3) Move back at a rapid traverse speed by  in the probe axis direction.

62
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• f: Value of "Axis Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the measurement


conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting"
• fb: Value of "Axis Direction Feedrate during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Axis Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
2
 measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
MEMO
Setting"
• : Value of "Axis Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
2
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Axis Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the 3
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"

Measurement start position


(Position above the reference
workpiece)

Clearance

Go past amount

Fig. 3.4.4.1 Motion for the Probe Length


NOTE
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

63
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

3.4.4.2 Stylus ball diameter


Measure the stylus ball diameter.
3.4.4.2

Position the probe to the circle center of the reference workpiece.

5 Table 3.4.4.2 Input Items for the Stylus Ball Diameter


Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description

2 1 Probe Direction Depends on the


parameter setting.
Z/X Select which probe to use,
one attached to the X-axis
direction or one attached to
the Z-axis direction.
3 2 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter setting. when multiple probes are
set on the machine.
3 Base Work Always shown Numerical value Diameter of the reference
Diameter workpiece
4 Measurement Always shown Numerical value Number of measurement
Point points (1 to 4)

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

 Motion
Before measurement, position the measuring probe to the circle center and
measurement height of the reference work.
When measurement starts, the following motion is performed:
1) Perform measurement from the position positioned before measurement at the moving
speed f within the range ( + ) in the +X-axis direction. (First measurement)

2) Move back in rapid traverse by , move in rapid traverse to the X-axis specified in "Aproch
Center Pt.X

3) Perform the same measurement for the -X-axis direction and ±Y-axis direction.

4) After first measurement, calculate the center position for second measurement based on
the measurement result of each obtained point.

5) Move at the moving speed fa to the position (first measurement position - ) in the +X-axis
direction and perform measurement from that position at the input speed fb within the
range ( + ). (Second measurement)

6) Perform the same measurement for the -X-axis direction and ±Y-axis direction.

64
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• fa: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting". However, a rapid traverse speed is used instead depending on the
2
parameter setting.
• fb: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
2
Setting"

 • : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement


conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting" 3
MEMO • : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)

• After all the measurement points are measured with the first measurement


NOTE
conditions, second measurement is performed. You cannot specify any other
motion.
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

3.4.4.3 Stylus Ball Offsets-A


Measure the stylus ball offset.
3.4.4.3

Position the probe to the circle center of the reference workpiece.

Table 3.4.4.3 Input Items for the Stylus Ball Offsets-A


Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description
1 Probe Direction Depends on the Z/X Select which probe to use,
parameter setting. one attached to the X-axis
direction or one attached to
the Z-axis direction.
2 Measurement Depends on the Condition number Select which probe to use
Cond. parameter setting. when multiple probes are
set on the machine.
3 Base Work Always shown Numerical value Diameter of the reference
Diameter workpiece

65
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

Item name Shown/hidden Input value Description


4 Measurement Always shown Numerical value Number of measurement
Point points (1 to 4)

5  • For details on the parameter settings, contact the MTB.


MEMO

2
 Motion
3 Before measurement, position the measuring probe to the circle center and
measurement height of the reference work.
When measurement starts, the following motion is performed:
1) Perform measurement from the position positioned before measurement at the moving
speed f within the range ( + ) in the +X-axis direction. (First measurement)

2) Move back in rapid traverse by , move in rapid traverse to the X-axis specified in "Aproch
Center Pt.X

3) Perform the same measurement for the -X-axis direction and ±Y-axis direction.

4) After first measurement, calculate the center position for second measurement based on
the measurement result of each obtained point.

5) Move at the moving speed fa to the position (first measurement position - ) in the +X-axis
direction and perform measurement from that position at the input speed fb within the
range ( + ). (Second measurement)

6) Perform the same measurement for the -X-axis direction and ±Y-axis direction.

66
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.4 MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

• f: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (1st)" in the


measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• fa: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate to Measurement Start Point" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting". However, a rapid traverse speed is used instead depending on the
2
parameter setting.
• fb: Value of "Radius Direction Feedrate during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
2
Setting"

 • : Value of "Radius Direction Measurement Distance (Cycle)" in the measurement


conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data Setting" 3
MEMO • : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (1st)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Overshoot Amount during Measurement" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• : Value of "Radius Direction Escaping Distance during Measurement (2nd)" in the
measurement conditions for the group number specified in "Measurement Data
Setting"
• r: Value of "Stylus Diameter X-Axis Direction / 2" for the group number specified in
"Measurement Data Setting" (Y-axis direction for Y-axis direction measurement)

• After all the measurement points are measured with the first measurement


NOTE
conditions, second measurement is performed. You cannot specify any other
motion.
• No second measurement is performed depending on the parameter setting.

67
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.5 EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN

3.5

3.5 EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN


The Execute Measurement screen allows you to execute measurement according to

5 the motion selected on the menu screen and the measurement conditions entered on
the measurement condition input screen.
A measurement program is generated when you put the CNC operation screen in

2 MDI mode while this screen is displayed.

3 A
B
E
C

F
G

Fig. 3.5 (a) Execute Measurement screen

Table 3.5 (a) Layout of the Execute Measurement Screen


Name Function
A Step display area Highlights the current operation ("Execute
Measurement" on this screen).
B Guidance area Displays operation instructions.
C Coordinate area Displays coordinate information.
You can switch between Absolute Coordinates",
"Relative Coordinates", and "Machine Coordinates" with
the soft keys.
D Modal area Displays modal information.
Modal information is not displayed when [All] is selected
with the [Current Position] soft key.
E Motion area Displays an image that represents the motion.
F Speed information area Displays the feedrate and the spindle speed.
G Message area Displays a warning message.

68
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.5 EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN

 Soft keys displayed on the Execute Measurement screen


Soft keys required for operation are displayed at the bottom of the Execute
Measurement screen.

2
A B C D E 2
Fig. 3.5 (b) Soft keys displayed on the Execute Measurement screen
3
Table 3.5 (b) Types of Soft Keys on the Execute Measurement Screen
Name Function
A Switches to the second page of soft keys for switching the
current position display.

[Current Position]
B Reads the measurement program.

[Reread]
C Switches to the measurement condition input screen.

[Back]
D Switches to the measurement result confirmation screen.

[Confirm Result]
E Closes the screen and returns to the menu screen.

[Close]

 Executable program
On the Execute Measurement screen, a program to be executed for measurement is
generated as an MDI program.
An MDI program is generated at the following timings:
• When the Execute Measurement screen is displayed
• When the mode is changed
• When the [Reread] soft key is pressed

69
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.5 EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN


NOTE
• When an MDI program is generated, the previously input MDI program is erased.

5
 Warning messages to be displayed during operation

2 Table 3.5 (c) Warning Messages to Be Displayed during Operation


Message Action

3 Protected This message appears if one of the following operations is


performed when an MDI program is write- and delete-protected by
8-level data protection:
• The Execute Measurement screen is displayed.
• The [Reread] soft key is pressed when MDI mode is set on the
Execute Measurement screen.
• The mode is switched from non-MDI to MDI on the Execute
Measurement screen.
Unprotect the MDI program.
In emergency stop This message appears if one of the following operations is
status. performed:
• The Execute Measurement screen is displayed.
• The [Reread] soft key is pressed when MDI mode is set on the
Execute Measurement screen.
• The mode is switched from non-MDI to MDI on the Execute
Measurement screen.
Reset the emergency stop.
In operation. This message appears if one of the following operations is
performed when the automatic operation status is STOP, HOLD,
STRT, or MSTR:
• The Execute Measurement screen is displayed.
• The [Reread] soft key is pressed when MDI mode is set on the
Execute Measurement screen.
• The mode is switched from non-MDI to MDI on the Execute
Measurement screen.
Put the automatic operation status in the reset state.
Depending on the parameter setting, this message is not triggered
by the operation when the automatic operation status is STOP.
Switch to MDI mode. This message appears if MDI mode is switched to another while a
measurement program is running:
Switch to MDI mode.

70
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

3.6

3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMA-


TION SCREEN
The measurement result confirmation screen allows you to confirm the measurement 2
result and apply it to the target.
The displayed screen is different as follows according to the selected motion:
2
Table 3.6 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for Each Motion
Measureme Motion Measurement result confirmation screen 3
nt target
Workpiece Face Measurement result confirmation screen for the
Outer Diameter Circle workpiece coordinate offset

Inner Diameter Circle


Outer Width
Inner Width
Outer Corner
Inner Corner
Workpiece Slant Measurement result confirmation screen for the
setting destination P code macro data
Tool Milling tool Measurement result confirmation screen for the
tool offset
Cutting Tool Measurement result confirmation screen for the
tool offset
Measureme Probe Length Calibration One of the following screens according to the
nt sensor Stylus Ball Diameter parameter setting:
Calibration • Measurement result confirmation screen for the
setting destination P code macro data
Stylus Offsets
• Measurement result confirmation screen for the
Calibration-A
tool offset

71
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

3.6.1 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the


Workpiece Coordinate Offset
3.6.1

The measurement result confirmation screen for the workpiece coordinate offset
displays the measurement result in the upper area of the screen and the list of
5 workpiece coordinates in the lower area of the screen.

A
2 B

3 C

Fig. 3.6.1 (a) Measurement result confirmation screen for the workpiece coordinate
offset

Table 3.6.1 (a) Layout of the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen


Name Function
A Step display area Highlights the current operation ("Confirm Result" on
this screen).
B Guidance area Displays operation instructions.
C Measurement result area Displays the measurement result, workpiece
coordinates to which the result is applied, and the
current offset value of the workpiece coordinates. If no
measurement result is obtained, each value shows "*".
D Workpiece coordinate offset Displays the list of workpiece coordinate offset values.
area

72
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

The workpiece coordinate offset area is the same as the workpiece coordinate offset
slide on the CNC operation screen except for the following points:
• Edit operation: You cannot directly edit the values of cells in the list.
 • Displayed tab: Even when the workpiece shift is enabled, the Workpiece Shift tab is
MEMO not displayed. 2
• Soft keys: The soft keys to edit values ([Measure], [+ Input], etc.) are not displayed.
• Icon for selected workpiece coordinates: The icon that indicates the selected
workpiece coordinates is not displayed.
2

 Soft keys displayed on the measurement result confirmation screen 3


Soft keys displayed on the measurement result confirmation screen vary depending
on the status.
• Before applying the result: Until the [Apply] soft key is pressed after the
measurement result confirmation screen is displayed
• After applying the result: After the [Apply] soft key is pressed

Before applying the result

A B C

Fig. 3.6.1 (b) Soft Keys Displayed on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(Before Applying the Result)

Table 3.6.1 (b) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(Before Applying the Result)
Name Function
A • Switches to the Execute Measurement screen.
• If a warning occurs, the message appears without switching
the screen.

[Back]
B • Applies the measurement result to the parameter and stores
the previous value.
• The soft keys change to the ones after applying the result.

[Apply]
C • Closes the screen and returns to the menu screen.

[Close]

73
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

After applying the result

5 A B C

Fig. 3.6.1 (c) Soft Keys Displayed on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen

2 (After Applying the Result)

Table 3.6.1 (c) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
3 (After Applying the Result)
Name Function
A • Switches to the Execute Measurement screen.
• The applied measurement result cannot be undone.
• The previous value is cleared.
• If a warning occurs, the message appears without switching
[Back] the screen.
B • Undoes the applied measurement result and clears the
previous value.
• The soft keys change to the ones before applying the result.

[Undo]
C • Closes the screen and returns to the menu screen.
• The previous value is cleared.

[Close]

 How to operate soft keys


<1> Press the [Apply] soft key.
The measurement result value is set to the workpiece coordinate offset of the
measurement target.
The [Apply] soft key changes to the [Undo] soft key.

To undo an applied value


Press the [Undo] soft key.
The original value is restored, and the [Undo] soft key changes back to the
[Apply] soft key.

Operation example
The following is an example of applying the measured value of the face in the Z-axis
direction to G54. It is assumed that the set value and the measured value are as
follows:
• G54 Z-axis offset before measurement: 40.0
• Measured value: 40.1

74
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

<1> Press the [Apply] soft key.


The G54 Z-axis offset changes from "40.0" to "40.1".
<2> Execute the program.
The G54 Z-axis offset is set to "41.0".
<3> Press the [Undo] soft key. 2
The G54 Z-axis offset changes from "41.0" to "40.0".

• The [Undo] soft key in quick manual measurement is different from the [Undo] soft
2
key on the CNC operation screen and disables only a measured value applied by
the [Apply] soft key. That is why even when you edit a value after pressing the
3
 [Apply] key, the value is not changed.
• In the following cases, even when you press the [Apply] soft key, the offset value is
MEMO not set with the warning message "Protected" displayed:
An offset change is protected by 8-level data protection.
A measured value is outside the input range set by the misoperation prevention
function.

3.6.2 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Set-


ting Destination P Code Macro Data
3.6.2

The measurement result confirmation screen for the setting destination P code
macro data displays the measurement result in the upper area of the screen and
destination P code macro data in the lower area of the screen.

A
B

Fig. 3.6.2 (a) Measurement result confirmation screen for the setting destination P
code macro data

75
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

Table 3.6.2 (a) Layout of the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the
Setting Destination P Code Macro Data
Name Function
A Step display area Highlights the current operation ("Confirm Result" on this
5 B Guidance area
screen).
Displays operation instructions.
C Measurement result Displays the measurement result, current value, and
2 area difference from the current value.
D Setting destination P Displays the setting macro number and the current set value.
code macro data area
3
 Soft keys displayed on the measurement result confirmation screen
Soft keys displayed on the measurement result confirmation screen vary depending
on the status.
• Before applying the result: Until the [Apply] soft key is pressed after the
measurement result confirmation screen is displayed
• When displaying the measurement result application confirmation window: Until
[Yes] or [No] is pressed after the [Apply] soft key is pressed
• After applying the result: After the [Apply] soft key is pressed (Of the soft keys
before applying the result, [Apply] is grayed out)

Before applying the result

A B C

Fig. 3.6.2 (b) Soft Keys Displayed on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(Before Applying the Result)

Table 3.6.2 (b) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(Before Applying the Result)
Name Function
A • Switches to the Execute Measurement screen.
• If a warning occurs, the message appears without switching
the screen.

[Back]
B • Applies the measurement result to the parameter.
• After applying the result, the soft key is grayed out (unable to
apply the result).

[Apply]

76
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

Name Function
C Closes the screen and returns to the menu screen.

[Close] 2
When displaying the measurement result application confirmation window
2

A B
3
Fig. 3.6.2 (c) Soft Keys Displayed on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(When Displaying the Measurement Result Application Confirmation Window)

Table 3.6.2 (c) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(When Displaying the Measurement Result Application Confirmation Window)
Name Function
A • Applies the measurement result.
• Once the result is applied, the original value cannot be
restored.

[Yes]
B • Returns to the previous screen without applying the
measurement result.

[No]

 How to operate soft keys


<1> Press the [Apply] soft key.
The measurement result value is set to "Setting Macro No.", and the Confirm
measurement result application window appears.
<2> Press [Yes] to apply the result or [No] not to apply the result.

• Once the result is applied, the original value cannot be restored.


 • If an offset change is protected by 8-level data protection, even when you press the
[Apply] soft key, the offset value is not set with the warning message "Protected"
MEMO
displayed.

77
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

3.6.3 Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Tool


Offset
3.6.3

The measurement result confirmation screen for the tool offset displays the
measurement result in the upper area of the screen and the list of tool offsets in the
5 lower area of the screen.

2 A

B
3
C

Fig. 3.6 (a) Measurement result confirmation screen for the tool offset

Table 3.6.3 (a) Layout of the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Tool
Offset
Name Function
A Step display area Highlights the current operation ("Confirm Result" on this
screen).
B Guidance area Displays operation instructions.
C Measurement result Displays the current offset data, measurement result, and
area difference from the current data.
D Tool offset area Displays the list of tool offset data in tabular format.

The tool offset area is the same as the tool offset slide on the CNC operation screen
 except for the following points:
MEMO • Edit operation: You cannot directly edit the values of cells in the list.
• Soft key: The tool offset slide soft key does not appear.

78
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

 Soft keys displayed on the measurement result confirmation screen


Soft keys displayed on the measurement result confirmation screen vary depending
on the status.
• Before applying the result: Until the [Apply] soft key is pressed after the
measurement result confirmation screen is displayed 2
• After applying the result: After the [Apply] soft key is pressed

Before applying the result


2
3
A B C

Fig. 3.6.3 (b) Soft Keys Displayed on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(Before Applying the Result)

Table 3.6.3 (b) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(Before Applying the Result)
Name Function
A • Switches to the Execute Measurement screen.
• If a warning occurs, the message appears without switching
the screen.

[Back]
B • Applies the measurement result to the parameter and stores
the previous value.
• The soft keys change to the ones after applying the result.

[Apply]
C Closes the screen and returns to the menu screen.

[Close]

After applying the result

A B C

Fig. 3.6.3 (c) Soft Keys Displayed on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(After Applying the Result)

79
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 3 QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT
 3.6 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION SCREEN

Table 3.6.3 (c) Types of Soft Keys on the Measurement Result Confirmation Screen
(After Applying the Result)
Name Function
A • Switches to the Execute Measurement screen.
5 •

The applied measurement result cannot be undone.
The previous value is cleared.
• If a warning occurs, the message appears without switching
[Back]
2 B
the screen.
• Undoes the applied measurement result and clears the
previous value.

3 • The soft keys change to the ones before applying the result.

[Undo]
C • Closes the screen and returns to the menu screen.
• The previous value is cleared.

[Close]

 How to operate soft keys


<1> Press the [Apply] soft key.
The measurement result value is set to the tool offset of the measurement
target number.
The [Apply] soft key changes to the [Undo] soft key.

To undo an applied value


Press the [Undo] soft key.
The original value is restored, and the [Undo] soft key changes back to the
[Apply] soft key.

The [Undo] soft key in quick manual measurement is different from the [Undo] soft
 key on the CNC operation screen and disables only a measured value applied by
the [Apply] soft key. That is why even when you edit a value after pressing the
MEMO
[Apply] key, the value is not changed.

80
MEASUREMENT 1

4 CYCLE (PROBE Z-
AXIS DIRECTION)
2
3
4
5
4.1 CALIBRATION........................................................................................ 82
4.2
4.3
TOOL MEASUREMENT ....................................................................... 101
WORKPIECE SETUP........................................................................... 108
6
4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION ....................................................... 142
4.5
4.6
CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)..................................................... 164
WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE).......................................... 172
7
4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE) ...................... 178
4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION) ... 184 A
4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION) .................. 191

81
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

4.1

4.1 CALIBRATION

5 G2000 Touch sensor position


When the reference tool is in the Z-axis direction, the position of the tool
measurement touch sensor is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool
measurement calibration data".

2 Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion

4 Measurement
Direc.
P Direction of the axis to measure
[+X] [-X][+Y] [-Y] [+Z] [-Z]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference (Tool Measurement A to D)
Reference Tool B Z-axis direction length of the reference tool
Axis Direction
Length
Reference Tool R XY-axis direction length of the reference tool
Radius
Specify K How to specify the measurement position [Setting
Measurement [Setting Value] Uses the position set in tool Value]
Position measurement calibration data
[Input] Uses the coordinates specified in
Measurement Positions XYZ
Measurement H X coordinate of the touch sensor to measure
Position X (only when [Input] is selected in Specify
Measurement Position)
Measurement V Y coordinate of the touch sensor to measure
Position Y (only when [Input] is selected in Specify
Measurement Position)
Measurement L Z coordinate of the touch sensor to measure
Position Z (only when [Input] is selected in Specify
Measurement Position)
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
touch sensor
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

82
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
Setting Dest. W How to set the measurement result [Compensati
[Compensation Value] Feeds back the result as
the compensation value
on Value]
2
[Reference Value] Sets the result as the
reference value and sets 0
to the compensation value
Setting Axis I Axis used to set the measurement result
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
 If the measurement result is less than OK
2
Feed Back Y
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or 4
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (for -Z-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and
Measurement Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Clearance C Return
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ DPRXQWİ
to the position of Clearance (C) in 2YHUVKRRWȖ
the Z-axis direction.
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st 1st measurement 2nd measurement
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

83
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion (for +X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to Clearance C
Measurement Position X (H) -
5 Clearance (C) and Measurement 2YHUVKRRWȖ
Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse 1st measurement
to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of Clearance (C) + 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

2 overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4 4) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd measurement

1st return amount β in rapid


traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement


Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

G2001 Probe length


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the length of the probe is measured. The
measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Refer.Work Height D Reference workpiece height of a part contacted by
the probe
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
top plane of the reference workpiece
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

84
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs. 2
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and
Measurement Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Return
Clearance C DPRXQWİ
to the position of Clearance (C) in 2YHUVKRRWȖ 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
the Z-axis direction. Reference
work height D
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
1st measurement 2nd measurement
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

G2002 Stylus ball diameter


The X-axis and Y-axis direction diameter of the stylus ball is measured. It is
performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result
is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

 measurement
In G2002, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For
using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "2062 Stylus
ball diameter".
MEMO

85
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
2 Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
4 Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +X-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-X-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

86
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach center X coordinate H
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter Reference work diameter D / 2 2
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Approach Center Y Coordinate
(V). Approach distance R
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and 2
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α 4


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
4) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

5) The above steps (3) to (4) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P) (1st
measurement).
The tool moves to the next axis
at moving speed fa.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) Based on the 1st measurement 2YHUVKRRWȖ
Calculated center coordinates
result, the center coordinates are
calculated for the 2nd
measurement.
7) The tool moves at moving speed
fa to the position of the calculated
center coordinates -β. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
8) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
9) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.
10)The above steps (8) to (9) are repeated in order for the axes of Measurement
Points (P) (2nd measurement).

87
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

11)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

5 G2003 Stylus ball center offset A


The X-axis and Y-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed
on the table. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement
calibration data".
2
• You need to enable the positioning (0° and 180°) of the spindle using M code by the

4  spindle orientation function.


• In G2003, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For
measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2063
MEMO
Stylus ball center offset A".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +X-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-X-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions

88
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs. 2
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate Approach center X coordinate H

(H) + (Reference Work Diameter Reference work diameter D / 2


D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Approach Center Y Coordinate
(V). Approach distance R
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) 0° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of
approach amount α + overshoot
γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement). $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

89
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to
5 return amount β in rapid traverse.
7) 180° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of β + γ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
again is measured again at
Moving Measurement Speed (F) (3rd measurement).

2 8) The tool is retracted back to return amount ε in rapid traverse.

9) The above steps (3) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
4 Measurement Points (P).
The tool moves to the next axis
at moving speed fa.
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2004 Stylus ball center offset B


The X-axis and Y-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed
on the table. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement
calibration data".

• You need to place the center of the reference workpiece correctly to the determined

 coordinates on the table.


• In G2004, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For
measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2064
MEMO
Stylus ball center offset B".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate

90
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of
Measurement
L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
2
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
2
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1]
[2]
Measure +X-axis direction only
Measure +/-X-axis directions
4
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

91
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach center X coordinate H
Approach Center X Coordinate
5 (H) + (Reference Work Diameter Reference work diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and
Approach Center Y Coordinate
(V). Approach distance R
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L

2 to the position of Height of


Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

4 3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

7) The above steps (3) to (6) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).
The tool moves to the next axis
at moving speed fa.
8) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

92
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

G2005 Stylus ball diameter workpiece rotation


The rotation axis is positioned by rotating C axis or using the spindle orientation
function, and the diameter of the stylus ball is calculated from the average of the
calculation results of multiple points on the circumference. It is performed with the
reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result is reflected to 2
"workpiece measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
2
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F) 4
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N Angle of the first measurement point of C axis or
the spindle (-360 < N < 360)
Pitch angle M Interval between each measurement point of C 90
axis or the spindle (0 < N < 360)
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) (*1)
Point

93
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
5 Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
2 equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
4 an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Measurement Points (P) is not entered, measurement is performed for each Pitch
Angle (M), starting from Starting Angle (N), and is repeated until it reaches the
entire circumference (360°).
*2: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion (for C-axis rotation)

1) C axis rotates to Starting Angle


(N).
Approach center X coordinate H
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Reference work diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
Approach distance R
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and Height of measurement
Approach Center Y Coordinate position L
(V).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

94
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ 2
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
2YHUVKRRWȖ
4
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
approach start point in rapid
traverse.

8) C axis rotates only by Pitch Angle


(M).
9) The above steps (4) to (8) are
repeated as many times as
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

G2006 Stylus ball offset A workpiece rotation


The rotation axis is positioned by rotating C axis or using the spindle orientation
function, and the center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from the spindle
center are measured from the average of the calculation results of multiple points on
the circumference. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table.
The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

 You need to enable the positioning (0° and 180°) of the spindle using M code by the
spindle orientation function.
MEMO

95
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
2 Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
4 Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N Angle of the first measurement point of C axis or
the spindle (-360 < N < 360)
Pitch angle M Interval between each measurement point of C 90
axis or the spindle (0 < N < 360)
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) (*1)
Point
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK Range,
Range(+/-) it is not set because it is regarded as no error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Measurement Points (P) is not entered, measurement is performed for each Pitch
Angle (M), starting from Starting Angle (N), and is repeated until it reaches the
entire circumference (360°).
*2: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

96
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion (for C-axis rotation)

1) C axis rotates to Starting Angle


(N).
Approach center X coordinate H
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Reference work diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
2
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
Approach distance R
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and Height of measurement
Approach Center Y Coordinate position L
(V).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
2
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L). 4
4) 0° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of
approach amount α + overshoot
γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement). $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
6) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement). 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
7) The tool is retracted back to
return amount β in rapid traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
8) 180° spindle orientation is 2YHUVKRRWȖ
performed, and the range of β + γ
again is measured again at
Moving Measurement Speed (F)
(3rd measurement).
9) The tool is retracted back to the
approach start point in rapid
traverse.
10)C axis rotates only by Pitch Angle
(M).
11)The above steps (4) to (10) are
repeated as many times as
Measurement Points (P).
12)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

97
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

G2007 Stylus ball offset B workpiece rotation


The rotation axis is positioned by rotating C axis or using the spindle orientation
function, and the center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from the spindle
center are measured from the average of the calculation results of multiple points on
5 the circumference. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table.
The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
2 Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
4 F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N Angle of the first measurement point of C axis or
the spindle (-360 < N < 360)
Pitch angle M Interval between each measurement point of C 90
axis or the spindle (0 < N < 360)
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) (*1)
Point

98
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs. 2
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: If Measurement Points (P) is not entered, measurement is performed for each Pitch
Angle (M), starting from Starting Angle (N), and is repeated until it reaches the
entire circumference (360°).
*2: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion (for C-axis rotation)

1) C axis rotates to Starting Angle


(N).
Approach center X coordinate H
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Reference work diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
Approach distance R
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and
Height of measurement
Approach Center Y Coordinate position L
(V).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

99
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.1 CALIBRATION

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5 5) The tool is retracted back to the $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

2
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured
4 at Moving Measurement Speed
2YHUVKRRWȖ

(F) (2nd measurement).


7) The tool is retracted back to the
approach start point in rapid
traverse.

8) C axis rotates only by Pitch Angle


(M).
9) The above steps (4) to (8) are
repeated as many times as
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

100
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

G2010 Milling tool measurement 2


When the reference tool is in the Z-axis direction, the tool length direction length and
tool diameter direction length of the milling tool are measured. The measurement
result is reflected to "tool offset amount".

Cycle data Description Default


value
2
Measurement motion
Measurement
Direc.
P Direction of the axis to measure 4
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference (Tool Measurement A to D)
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
touch sensor
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Specify X Axis H How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
X Axis Direction D X-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation

101
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
Specify Y Axis V How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions

5 Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset


amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) as the
2 shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) added to

4 the tool offset amount as the


shift amount
Y Axis Direction R Y-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Specify Z Axis L How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) as the shift
amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
Z Axis Direction Z Z-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item used to set the measurement result (*1)
T (Turning)/M J
(Milling)

102
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: When the tool geometry and wear compensation options are enabled, if the
measurement result is set to the geometry compensation amount, the wear
compensation amount is set to 0. If the measurement result is set to the wear
compensation amount, a difference between the original geometry compensation
amount and the measurement result is set.

 Measurement motion (measurement of tool length direction offset amount)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to Measurement Positions XY.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Clearance (C) in
the Z-axis direction.
Return
Clearance C
3) The range of Clearance (C) + 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ DPRXQWİ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st measurement 2nd measurement
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

103
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

 Measurement motion (measurement of tool diameter direction offset


amount)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
5 Measurement Position X - Clearance C
Clearance (C) and Measurement
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Position Y.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
1st measurement
to Measurement Position Z (L).

2 3) The range of Clearance (C) +


5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
4 measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd measurement
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
5) The range of return amount β +
overshoot γ is measured at moving speed f2 (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

G2011 Turning tool measurement


When the reference tool is in the Z-axis direction, the Z-axis direction length and X-
axis direction length of the turning tool are measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool offset amount".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc.
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference (Tool Measurement A to D)
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
touch sensor
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

104
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
Specify X Axis H How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically 2
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
2
Compensation (D) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
4
X Axis Direction D X-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Specify Y Axis V How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
Y Axis Direction R Y-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Specify Z Axis L How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) as the shift
amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount

105
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
Z Axis Direction Z Z-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)

5 Compensation
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T measurement result is set
Setting I Item used to set the measurement result (*1)
Destination(T)
2 OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
4 error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: When the tool geometry and wear compensation options are enabled, if the
measurement result is set to the geometry compensation amount, the wear
compensation amount is set to 0. If the measurement result is set to the wear
compensation amount, a difference between the original geometry compensation
amount and the measurement result is set.

 Measurement motion (measurement of -Z-axis direction offset amount)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to Measurement Positions XY.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Clearance (C) in
the Z-axis direction. Return
Clearance C
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ DPRXQWİ
3) The range of Clearance (C) + 2YHUVKRRWȖ
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st measurement 2nd measurement

1st return amount β in rapid traverse.


5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

106
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

 Measurement motion (measurement of +X-axis direction offset amount)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Clearance C
Measurement Position X -
Clearance (C) and Measurement 2YHUVKRRWȖ 2
Position Y.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse 1st measurement
to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of Clearance (C) + 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
2
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd measurement 4
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement


Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

107
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

5 G2020 End face measurement (X-axis direction)


The position of the X-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default

2 Measurement motion
value

Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure


4 Direc. [+X] [-X]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
T (Turning)/M U set the measurement result to (*1)
(Milling)
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

108
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Measurement motion (for +X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) - $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
approach amount α and
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R
to the position of Measurement
Position Z (L) + Approach 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Distance (R) in the Z-axis 1st measurement
direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
6) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of 2nd measurement
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

109
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2021 End face measurement (Y-axis direction)


The position of the Y-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

5 Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+Y] [-Y]

2 Measurement
Cond.
Q Group number of the measurement condition to
reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to

4 Measurement H
F)
X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
T (Turning)/M U set the measurement result to (*1)
(Milling)
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

110
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Measurement motion (for +Y-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse +Y-axis direction


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
Measurement Position Y (V) -
2YHUVKRRWȖ
approach amount α.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R
to the position of Measurement
Position Z (L) + Approach 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Distance (R) in the Z-axis 1st measurement
direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
6) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of 2nd measurement
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

111
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2022 End face measurement (Z-axis direction)


The position of the Z-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

5 Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+Z] [-Z]

2 Measurement
Cond.
Q Group number of the measurement condition to
reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to

4 Measurement H
F)
X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
T (Turning)/M U set the measurement result to (*1)
(Milling)
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

112
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Measurement motion (for -Z-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and
Measurement Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Measurement 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Position Z (L) + Approach
Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction.
3) The range of Approach Distance 1st measurement
(R) + overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) When the measurement is Approach distance R
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
2nd measurement

113
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2023 Outside diameter circle measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the circle outside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece
coordinates system".
5
 Inmeasurement
G2023, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For
using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2073
Outside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

2 Cycle data Description Default


value

4 Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +X-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-X-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°

114
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X
T (Turning)/M
A position
2
(Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
2
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 4
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X Coordinate (H) + Center X coordinate H
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α + Outside diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

115
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
5 + overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ

moving speed f1 (1st


measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
2 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
4 (F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

G2024 Inside diameter circle measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the inside diameter of
the circle is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece
coordinates system".

 Inmeasurement
G2024, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For
using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2074 Inside
diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

116
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
2
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle 2
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement 4
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +X-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-X-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X A position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)

117
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
2  If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

4 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X Coordinate (H) + Center X coordinate H

(Inside Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Inside diameter D / 2


radius) and Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

118
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid 2
traverse.
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
to Center X Coordinate (H).

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of 2
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid 4
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2025 Outside width measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the projection width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [X-Axis], [Y-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Projection Width D Original length of the projection width
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position X if measurement is in the
Y-axis direction)
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
X-axis direction)
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height

119
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement

5 Speed
Inclination angle M
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)
2 OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
4 Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (measurement of X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X coordinate H
Center X Coordinate (H) +
Projection Width D / 2
(Projection Width D / 2 + α + ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
3) The range of approach amount α 2YHUVKRRWȖ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
traverse.

120
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

5) The range of β + γ is measured 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ


2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid 2
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R


to the position of Height of Height of
measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
2
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the center coordinates, and 4
the above steps (1) to (6) are
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the projection.

G2026 Inside width measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the groove width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [X-Axis], [Y-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Groove width D Original value of the groove width
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the groove
coordinates width
(Measurement Position X if measurement is in the
Y-axis direction)
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the groove
coordinates width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
X-axis direction)
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height

121
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement

5 Speed
Inclination angle M
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)
2 OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
4 Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (measurement of X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X coordinate H
Center X Coordinate (H) +
(Groove width D / 2 - α - stylus Groove Width D / 2
radius) and Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement
position L
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
3) The range of approach amount α 2YHUVKRRWȖ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

122
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).

5HWXUQDPRXQWİ 2
6) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the center coordinates, and
the above steps (1) to (5) are
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the groove. 2
7) When the measurement is finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position
of Height of Measurement Position (L) - Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction. 4

G2027 Outside corner measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the angle of the outside corner (opposite
side of the measurement position) of the XY plane is measured. The measurement
result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement Motion 1
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
2nd Measurement X X coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position X position
2nd Measurement Z Y coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position Y position
3rd Measurement A X coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position X position
3rd Measurement B Y coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position Y position
4th Measurement C X coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position X position
4th Measurement D Y coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position Y position

123
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement Motion 2
1st Measurement M 1st and 2nd measurement direction
5 Direction
3rd Measurement P 3rd and 4th measurement direction
Direction
Corner X U X coordinate of the corner
Coordinate
Corner Y E Y coordinate of the corner
2 Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
4 Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
set the measurement result to (*1)
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X position
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y position
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK Range,
Range(+/-) it is not set because it is regarded as no error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
Setting Macro Var. T Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27246

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

124
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Corner outside measurement

The angle of the outside corner

Measurement position
(opposite side of the measurement Corner angle Measurement
position
position) is measured. to measure

2
Corner angle to measure
Measurement position

 Measurement motion
2
1) (If the 1st measurement position
is in the +X-axis direction) The
tool moves in rapid traverse from $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ 4
the current position to 1st
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position X (H) -
approach amount α and
Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V).
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement). Approach distance R
Height of measurement
6) When the measurement is position L
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
of Measurement Position (L) -
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.
7) The above steps (1) to (6) are repeated to measure the 2nd to 4th positions.

125
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2028 Inside corner measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the angle of the inside corner
(measurement position side) of the XY plane is measured. The measurement result
is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".
5
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement Motion 1
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to

2 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)

4 1st Measurement
Start Position X
H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
2nd Measurement X X coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position X position
2nd Measurement Z Y coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position Y position
3rd Measurement A X coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position X position
3rd Measurement B Y coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position Y position
4th Measurement C X coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position X position
4th Measurement D Y coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position Y position
Measurement Motion 2
1st Measurement M 1st and 2nd measurement direction
Direction
3rd Measurement P 3rd and 4th measurement direction
Direction
Corner X U X coordinate of the corner
Coordinate
Corner Y E Y coordinate of the corner
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

126
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
set the measurement result to (*1)
2
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X position
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y position
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK 2
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
4
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
Setting Macro Var. T Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27246

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Corner inside measurement

The angle of the inside corner


position
Measurement

(measurement position side) is Measurement


position
measured.

Corner angle
to measure
Corner angle
to measure Measurement position

127
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Measurement motion

1) (If the 1st measurement position


is in the +X-axis direction) The
tool moves in rapid traverse from $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
5 the current position to 1st
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position X (H) -
approach amount α and
Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V).
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L

2 to the position of Height of


Measurement Position (L) +
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb

4 to Height of Measurement Position (L).


3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement). Approach distance R
Height of measurement
6) When the measurement is position L
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) -
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.
7) The above steps (1) to (6) are repeated to measure the 2nd to 4th positions.

G2029 Workpiece angle measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the workpiece angle of the XY plane is
measured. With the angle obtained from the measurement as the Z-axis rotation
angle, G68 (coordinate rotation) is performed.

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement Motion 1
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+X] [-X] [+Y] [-Y]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position

128
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
Angle of rotation A Workpiece inclination when +X axis is 0°
2
2nd Measurement C X coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position X position
2nd Measurement D Y coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position Y position
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement 2
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height 4
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Macro Var. W Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
T (Turning)/M U measurement result No.27246
(Milling)
Rotation center X X coordinate of the rotation center for coordinate
coordinates X I rotation
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
Rotation center Z Y coordinate of the rotation center for coordinate
coordinates Y J rotation
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

129
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Workpiece angle measurement

The inclination angle of the


workpiece is measured.

5
Measurement position Corner angle to
measure

 Measurement motion

2 1) (If the 1st measurement position


is in the -X-axis direction) The
tool moves in rapid traverse from $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
4 the current position to 1st
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position X (H) -
approach amount α and
Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V).
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
6) Move the two axes X and Y
Height of measurement
simultaneously to the positions position L
specified in "2nd Meas.Strt Pt.X"
and "2nd Meas.Strt Pt.Y", 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
respectively.
7) The above steps (3) to (5) are repeated to measure the 2nd position.
8) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.
9) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

130
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2031 C-axis phase outside width measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the C-axis center angle of the projection
width is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates
system".
2
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to 2
F)
Measurement
Position X
H X coordinate of the position to measure
4
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Center Angle A Original center angle of the projection width
Angle Range of C Center angle of the measurement range
Measurement
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

131
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and
5 Measurement Position Y (V).
2) C-axis rotates to Center Angle C axis

(A) - Angle Range of


Approach distance R
Measurement (C). Height of measurement
position L
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse
2 to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Angle range of
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- measurement C
4 axis direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Height of
Center angle A

Measurement Position (L).


4) Angle Range of Measurement
(C) is measured at moving speed
f1 in the +C-axis direction (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
6) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) in the +C-axis direction (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- Approach distance R
axis direction. Height of measuremen
position L

9) C-axis rotates to Center Angle Center angle A


(A) + Angle Range of Angle range of
Measurement (C), and the above measurement C
steps (3) to (8) are repeated in
the -C-axis direction.

132
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2032 C-axis phase inside width measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the C-axis center angle of the groove width
is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates
system".
2
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to 2
F)
Measurement
Position X
H X coordinate of the position to measure
4
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Center Angle A Original center angle of the groove width
Angle Range of C Center angle of the measurement range
Measurement
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

133
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and
5 Measurement Position Y (V).
C axis
2) C-axis rotates to Center Angle
(A).
Approach distance R
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
measurement
to the position of Height of position L
2 Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
Angle range of
measurement C
axis direction and then moves at Center angle A

4 moving speed fb to Height of


Measurement Position (L).

4) Angle Range of Measurement


(C) is measured at moving speed
f1 in the +C-axis direction (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
6) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) in the +C-axis direction (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

8) C-axis rotates to Center Angle


(A), and the above steps (4) to
(7) are repeated in the -C-axis
direction.

9) When the measurement is


finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) - Approach distance R
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- Height of measurement
position L
axis direction.

134
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2035 Workpiece setting error measurement (XY plane)


Three points on the XY plane are measured.

By measuring three points each


(total of nine) on the XY plane, 2
YZ plane, and ZX plane of the
slant workpiece, a workpiece Z
setting error can be calculated.
The calculated workpiece X
Y
setting error is output to the NC

 and can be used for the workpiece setting error compensation function. 2
• Only cuboid workpieces can be measured.
• The error measurement range θ is -90° < θ < 90°.
MEMO
• Measurement can be performed only when the probe is in the Z-axis direction. 4
• You need to perform all of the following four cycles, Workpiece Setting Error
Measurement (Workpiece Setting) for the last.
G2035 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (XY Plane)
G2036 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (YZ Plane)
G2037 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (ZX Plane)
G2038 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (Workpiece Setting)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
1st Measurement X Z coordinate of the 1st measurement start position
Start Position Z
2nd Distance A X-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 2nd position
3rd Distance B Y-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 3rd position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

135
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to 1st
Measurement Start Position X
5 (H) and 1st Measurement Start
Position Y (V).
Approach Return
distance R 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ DPRXQWİ
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse 2YHUVKRRWȖ
to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z (X)

2 + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-


axis direction. 1st measurement 2nd measurement
3) The tool moves from the
4 approach point to 1st Measurement Start Position Z at the speed moving to the
measurement start point in the axis direction.
4) The range of Approach Distance (R) + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
6) The range of β + γ is measured at Moving Measurement Speed (F) (2nd
measurement).
7) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of 1st Measurement Start Position
Z (X) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.
8) The above steps (1) to (7) are repeated to measure the 2nd and 3rd positions.

136
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2036 Workpiece setting error measurement (YZ plane)


Three points on the YZ plane are measured.

By measuring three points each


(total of nine) on the XY plane, 2
YZ plane, and ZX plane of the
slant workpiece, a workpiece Z
setting error can be calculated.
X
The calculated workpiece Y
setting error is output to the NC

 and can be used for the workpiece setting error compensation function. 2
• Only cuboid workpieces can be measured.
• The error measurement range θ is -90° < θ < 90°.
MEMO
• Measurement can be performed only when the probe is in the Z-axis direction. 4
• You need to perform all of the following four cycles, Workpiece Setting Error
Measurement (Workpiece Setting) for the last.
G2035 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (XY Plane)
G2036 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (YZ Plane)
G2037 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (ZX Plane)
G2038 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (Workpiece Setting)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement M 1st to 3rd measurement direction
Direc.
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
1st Measurement X Z coordinate of the 1st measurement start position
Start Position Z
2nd Distance A Y-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 2nd position
3rd Distance B Z-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 3rd position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

137
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to 1st
Measurement Position X (H) and $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
5 1st Measurement Start Position Y
2YHUVKRRWȖ
(V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R
to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z (X) 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

2 + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-


axis direction and then moves at
1st measurement

moving speed fb to 1st Measurement Start Position Z (X).

4 3) The tool moves from the approach point to 1st Measurement Start Position Z at
the speed moving to the measurement start point in the axis direction.
4) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed f1
(1st measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
7) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z (X) 2nd measurement
+ Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
8) The above steps (1) to (7) are repeated to measure the 2nd and 3rd positions.

138
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2037 Workpiece setting error measurement (YZ plane)


Three points on the ZX plane are measured.

By measuring three points each


(total of nine) on the XY plane, 2
YZ plane, and ZX plane of the
slant workpiece, a workpiece Z
setting error can be calculated.
The calculated workpiece X
Y
setting error is output to the NC

 and can be used for the workpiece setting error compensation function. 2
• Only cuboid workpieces can be measured.
• The error measurement range θ is -90° < θ < 90°.
MEMO
• Measurement can be performed only when the probe is in the Z-axis direction. 4
• You need to perform all of the following four cycles, Workpiece Setting Error
Measurement (Workpiece Setting) for the last.
G2035 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (XY Plane)
G2036 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (YZ Plane)
G2037 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (ZX Plane)
G2038 Workpiece Setting Error Measurement (Workpiece Setting)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement M 1st to 3rd measurement direction
Direc.
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
1st Measurement X Z coordinate of the 1st measurement start position
Start Position Z
2nd Distance A X-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 2nd position
3rd Distance B Z-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 3rd position
Approach Distance R Y-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

139
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse +Y-axis direction


from the current position to 1st
Measurement Position X (H) and $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
5 1st Measurement Start Position Y
2YHUVKRRWȖ
(V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R
to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z (X) 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

2 + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-


axis direction and then moves at
1st measurement

moving speed fb to 1st Measurement Start Position Z (X).

4 3) The tool moves from the approach point to 1st Measurement Start Position Z at
the speed moving to the measurement start point in the axis direction.
4) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed f1
(1st measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
7) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z (X) 2nd measurement
+ Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
8) The above steps (1) to (7) are repeated to measure the 2nd and 3rd positions.

G2038 Workpiece setting error measurement (workpiece set-


ting)
A workpiece setting error is calculated, and the result is output to the specified macro
variable.

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Setting Direction W Workpiece error compensation number storing the None
Compensation No. calculation result
(If it is not entered, the calculation result is not
stored)
Corner Coordinate U Original X coordinate of the corner (a point where
X three planes intersect with each other)

140
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Corner Coordinate E Original Y coordinate of the corner (a point where
Y three planes intersect with each other)
Corner Coordinate C
Z
Original Z coordinate of the corner (a point where
three planes intersect with each other)
2
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back 2
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs. 4
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

Corner coordinate
G2035

X
G2037 Y
G2036

141
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

5 G2040 End face measurement (X-axis direction)


The position of the X-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default

2 Measurement motion
value

Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure


4 Direc. [+X] [-X]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during measurement
Measurement
Speed
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)

142
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
 Measurement motion (for +X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) - $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
approach amount α and
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R
to the position of Measurement
Position Z (L) + Approach 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Distance (R) in the Z-axis 1st measurement
direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
6) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of 2nd measurement
Measurement Position Z (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

143
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

G2041 End face measurement (Y-axis direction)


The position of the Y-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool management data".

5 Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+Y] [-Y]

2 Measurement
Cond.
Q Group number of the measurement condition to
reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to

4 Measurement H
F)
X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during measurement
Measurement
Speed
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

144
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

 Measurement motion (for +Y-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse +Y-axis direction


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
Measurement Position Y (V) -
2YHUVKRRWȖ
2
approach amount α.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R
to the position of Measurement
Position Z (L) + Approach 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction and then moves at
1st measurement
2
moving speed fb to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
6) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of 2nd measurement
Measurement Position Z (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2042 End face measurement (Z-axis direction)


The position of the Z-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+Z] [-Z]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y

145
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z

5 Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point


to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during measurement
Measurement
Speed
Tool
2 Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
4 Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (for -Z-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Measurement Position X (H) and
Measurement Position Y (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Measurement 2YHUVKRRWȖ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Position Z (L) + Approach
Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction.
3) The range of Approach Distance 1st measurement 2nd measurement
(R) + overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

146
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

5) The range of β + γ is measured at Moving Measurement Speed (F) (2nd


measurement).
6) When the measurement is finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position
of Measurement Position Z (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

2
G2043 Outside diameter circle measurement
When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the circle outside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".
2
• In G2043, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For


measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2083
Outside diameter circle measurement". 4
• In G2043, measurement is performed by moving the probe. To perform
MEMO measurement by rotating the workpiece (C axis), see "G2053 Outside diameter
circle measurement (workpiece rotation)".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +X-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-X-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions

147
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement

5 [Yes] Performs the spindle orientation


during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Tool
2 Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
4 Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X Coordinate (H) + Center X coordinate H
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α + Outside diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

148
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement). 4
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

G2044 Inside diameter circle measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the inside diameter of
the circle is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".

• In G2044, measurement is performed using +/-X axis and +/-Y axis. For
measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2084
 Inside diameter circle measurement".
• In G2044, measurement is performed by moving the probe. To perform
MEMO measurement by rotating the workpiece (C axis), see "G2054 Inside diameter circle
measurement (workpiece rotation)".

149
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
2 Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
4 Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +X-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-X-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)

150
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X Coordinate (H) + Center X coordinate H

(Inside Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Inside diameter D / 2


radius) and Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

151
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
5 2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
to Center X Coordinate (H).

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


2 repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are
4 finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2045 Outside width measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the projection width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [X-Axis], [Y-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Projection Width D Original length of the projection width
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position X if measurement is in the
Y-axis direction)
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
X-axis direction)
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height

152
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Inclination angle M
2
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the 2
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result 4
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (measurement of X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X coordinate H
Center X Coordinate (H) +
Projection Width D / 2
(Projection Width D / 2 + α + ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
3) The range of approach amount α 2YHUVKRRWȖ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
traverse.

153
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

5) The range of β + γ is measured 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ


2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
5 2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R


to the position of Height of Height of
measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L

2 Approach Distance (R) in the Z-


axis direction.
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
4 to the center coordinates, and
the above steps (1) to (6) are
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the projection.

G2046 Inside width measurement


When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the groove width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [X-Axis], [Y-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Groove width D Original value of the groove width
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the groove
coordinates width
(Measurement Position X if measurement is in the
Y-axis direction)
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the groove
coordinates width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
X-axis direction)
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height

154
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Inclination angle M
2
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the 2
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result 4
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (measurement of X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X coordinate H
Center X Coordinate (H) +
(Groove width D / 2 - α - stylus Groove Width D / 2
radius) and Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement
position L
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

155
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
3) The range of approach amount α 2YHUVKRRWȖ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5 4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
2 (F) (2nd measurement).

4
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

6) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the center coordinates, and
the above steps (1) to (5) are
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the groove.
7) When the measurement is finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position
of Height of Measurement Position (L) - Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction.

G2047 Slant measurement indexing cycle


Three points on the XY plane are measured to index the slant plane. The
measurement result is output to the specified macro variable.

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
1st Measurement X1 X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement Y1 Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
1st Measurement Z1 Z coordinate of the 1st measurement start position
Start Position Z
2nd Distance X2 X-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 2nd position
3rd Distance Y2 Y-axis direction distance from the 1st position to
the 3rd position

156
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
1st Moving Speed f1 Moving speed during the 1st measurement
Approach Distance α Approach amount during the 1st measurement
1st Return Amount β Return amount during the 1st measurement 2
Overshoot γ Overshoot during measurement
2nd Moving Speed f2 Moving speed during the 2nd measurement
2nd Return ε Return amount after the 2nd contact
Amount

 Measurement motion
2
1) The tool moves from the current
position to 1st Measurement
Cycle start position
(1) 4
Start Position X (X1) and 1st
(2)
Measurement Start Position Y
1st measurement (3)
(Y1). start position
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z
(Z1) + Approach Distance (α) in
the Z-axis direction
(The moving speed follows the
parameter No. 12380#02).
3) The tool moves to 1st Z
Measurement Start Position Z
(Z1) at moving speed f1. Y

X
Workpiece coordinates system

4) The range of 1st Approach


1st measurement
Distance (α) + Overshoot (γ) is start position
moved at 1st moving speed (f1)
in the -Z-axis direction and then (4) (7)
measured (5)(6)
(1st measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back from
the measurement position to 1st
Return Amount (β) in rapid
traverse
(When the parameter No.
27228#3 is set to 1, steps 5) and
6) are not followed).

157
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

6) The range of 2nd Return Amount (ε) + Overshoot (γ) is moved at 2nd moving
speed (f2) in the -Z-axis direction and then measured
(2nd measurement).

7) The tool is retracted back to 1st


5 Measurement Start Position Z
(Z1) in rapid traverse.
1st measurement 2nd measurement
8) The tool moves to the position of start position start position
1st Measurement Start Position X (8)
(X1) + 2nd Distance (X2) in the
(9)
X-axis direction.
2 9) The above steps 4) to 7) are
repeated.

10)The X-axis moves to 1st (12)


Measurement Start Position X
3rd measurement
(X1), and the Y-axis moves to 1st start position
Measurement Start Position Y
(11) 2nd measurement
(Y1) + 3rd Distance (Y3). (10)
start position

11)The above steps 4) to 7) are


repeated.
12)The Z-axis moves in rapid
traverse to the position of 1st
Measurement Start Position Z
(Z1) + 1st Approach Distance (α)
(When the parameter No.
27224#0 is set to 1 (indicating
that "approach distance" is not displayed), the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
height during measurement cycle start).

G2053 Outside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rota-


tion)
When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the circle outside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".

 Inmeasurement
G2053, measurement is performed by rotating the workpiece (C axis). To perform
by moving the probe, see "G2043 Outside diameter circle
measurement".
MEMO

158
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
2
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle 2
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement 4
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)

159
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
2  If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

4 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X coordinate H
Center X Coordinate (H) +
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α + Outside diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
4) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

160
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The range of β + γ is measured
2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of 2
Measurement Position (L) + 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
Pitch angle M
7) The tool moves in rapid traverse
back to the center coordinates,
the workpiece (C axis) rotates by
2
Pitch Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the
above steps (1) to (6) are repeated in order. 4
8) When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

G2054 Inside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rota-


tion)
When the probe is in the Z-axis direction, the center position of the inside diameter of
the circle is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".

 measurement
In G2054, measurement is performed by rotating the workpiece (C axis). To perform
by moving the probe, see "G2044 Inside diameter circle
measurement".
MEMO

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates

161
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement

5 Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
2 Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
4 Point
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

162
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y 2
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L Reference work diameter D / 2
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Inside Diameter D / 2
- α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.
4
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
5) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).

5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
7) The tool moves in rapid traverse Pitch angle M

back to the center coordinates,


the workpiece (C axis) rotates by
Pitch Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the
above steps (1) to (6) are
repeated in order.
8) When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

163
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

5 G2062 Stylus ball diameter


The diameter of the stylus ball is measured at a specific angle. Since the
measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is possible. It
is performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement
result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

2
 In+/-XG2062, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2002 Stylus ball diameter".
4 MEMO

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

164
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs. 2
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L Reference work diameter D / 2
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Reference Work
Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

165
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5 5) The tool is retracted back to the
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

2 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured
4 at Moving Measurement Speed
2YHUVKRRWȖ

(F) (2nd measurement).


7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the approach center
coordinates, the direction
changes by Pitch Angle (M) as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
many times as Measurement
Points (P), and the above steps
(3) to (7) are repeated in order. Pitch angle M
9) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2063 Stylus ball center offset A


The X-axis and Y-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured at a specific angle. Since the measurement angle
can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is possible. It is performed with the
reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result is reflected to
"workpiece measurement calibration data".

• You need to enable the positioning (0° and 180°) of the spindle using M code by the
 spindle orientation function.
• In G2063, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
MEMO +/-X axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2003 Stylus ball center offset A".

166
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
2
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate 2
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure 4
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

167
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
5 (H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L Reference work diameter D / 2

2 Approach Distance (R) in the Z- ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV


axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).

4 3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Reference Work
Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

4) 0° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of
approach amount α + overshoot
γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement). $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to
return amount β in rapid traverse.
8) 180° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of β + γ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
is measured again at moving
speed f2 (3rd measurement).
9) The tool is retracted back to return amount ε in rapid traverse.

10)The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the approach center
coordinates, the direction
changes by Pitch Angle (M) as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
many times as Measurement
Points (P), and the above steps
(3) to (9) are repeated in order. Pitch angle M

168
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

11)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

G2064 Stylus ball center offset B 2


The X-axis and Y-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured at a specific angle. Since the measurement angle
can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is possible. It is performed with the
reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result is reflected to
"workpiece measurement calibration data". 2
• You need to place the center of the reference workpiece correctly to the determined
 coordinates on the table. 4
• In G2064, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
MEMO +/-X axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2004 Stylus ball center offset B".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

169
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
5 Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
2 equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
4 an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L Reference work diameter D / 2
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Reference Work
Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

170
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ 2
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
2YHUVKRRWȖ
4
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the approach center
coordinates, the direction
changes by Pitch Angle (M) as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
many times as Measurement
Points (P), and the above steps
(3) to (7) are repeated in order. Pitch angle M
9) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

171
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC


ANGLE)
5
G2073 Outside diameter circle measurement
The center position of the circle outside diameter is measured at a specific angle.
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".
2
 In+/-XG2073, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
4 MEMO
axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2023 Outside diameter circle measurement".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

172
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement 2
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement 2
Value X A position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling) 4
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X Coordinate (H) + Center X coordinate H
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α + Outside diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
Height of measurement
position L

173
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


5 Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
2 5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
4 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) + Height of measurement
position L
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

9) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Starting angle N
Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the Pitch angle M
above steps (1) to (8) are Pitch angle M
repeated in order.
10)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

G2074 Inside diameter circle measurement


The center position of the circle inside diameter is measured at a specific angle.
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

 In+/-XG2074, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using


axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2024 Inside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

174
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
2
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle 2
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement 4
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X A position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)

175
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
2  If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

4 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L Inside diameter D / 2
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
axis direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Inside Diameter D / 2
- α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

4) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
5) The range of approach amount α
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

176
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
7) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
8) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid 2
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

9) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Angle (M) as many times as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
2
Measurement Points (P), and the
above steps (1) to (8) are
repeated in order.
4
Pitch angle M
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

177
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPE-


CIFIC ANGLE)
5
G2083 Outside diameter circle measurement
The center position of the circle outside diameter is measured at a specific angle.
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".
2
 In+/-XG2083, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
4 MEMO
axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2043 Outside diameter circle measurement".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

178
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement 2
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the 2
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the 4
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Center X Coordinate (H) + Center X coordinate H
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α + Outside diameter D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
stylus radius) and Center Y
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

179
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
5 + overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ

moving speed f1 (1st


measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
2 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
4 (F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) + Height of measurement
position L
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

9) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Starting angle N
Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the Pitch angle M
above steps (1) to (8) are Pitch angle M
repeated in order.
10)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

G2084 Inside diameter circle measurement


The center position of the circle inside diameter is measured at a specific angle.
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".

 In+/-XG2084, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using


axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2044 Inside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

180
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
2
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center X H Original center position X coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Y V Original center position Y coordinate of the circle 2
coordinates
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement 4
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)

181
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
2  If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

4 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate.
If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Height of measurement
Measurement Position (L) + position L Inside diameter D / 2
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
axis direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Inside Diameter D / 2
- α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

4) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
5) The range of approach amount α
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2YHUVKRRWȖ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ

182
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
7) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
8) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid 2
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

9) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Angle (M) as many times as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
2
Measurement Points (P), and the
above steps (1) to (8) are
repeated in order.
4
Pitch angle M
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

183
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

4.2

4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION


(PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
5
G2320 Center of circle that passes three holes - coordinate
specification
The center coordinates of a circle that passes the center of three holes are
2 measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


4 value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Hole Diameter D Diameter value of Holes 1 to 3 to measure
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (3 to 4) [4]
Point [3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Measurement position
Hole 1 Center X H Center position X coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate
Hole 1 Center Y V Center position Y coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate

184
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Hole 2 Center X X Center position X coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate
Hole 2 Center Y
Coordinate
Y Center position Y coordinate of Hole 2
2
Hole 3 Center X W Center position X coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate
Hole 3 Center Y Z Center position Y coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate
Work T (Turning)/M (Milling) 2
Setting Dest. U Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
set the measurement result to (*1)
Work Coordinate A Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement 4
Value X position
Work Coordinate B Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y position
Circle Center I Target X coordinate of the center position of a
Coordinate Value circle that passes the center of Holes 1 to 3
X
Circle Center J Target Y coordinate of the center position of a
Coordinate Value circle that passes the center of Holes 1 to 3
Y
OK Range(+/-) K Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
Feed Back E  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".
*2: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

185
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

 Center of a circle that passes three holes

The center coordinates of a circle Center coordinates of circle to measure


that passes the center of three holes
are measured. Hole 1

Hole 2
Hole 3
2
 Measurement motion
4
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Hole
1 Center X Coordinate (H) + Hole 1 center X coordinate H

(Hole Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Hole Diameter D / 2


radius) and Hole 1 Center Y ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
to the position of Height of measurement
position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle 2YHUVKRRWȖ
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

186
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

8) The above steps (1) to (7) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

2
9) When the measurement is Hole 1
finished for Hole 1, the tool
moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- 2
axis direction. Hole 2
Hole 3
10)Measurement is performed for
Holes 2 and 3 in the above order.
4

G2321 Cross of diagonals of four holes


The cross coordinates of diagonals that pass the center of four holes are measured.
The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Hole Diameter D Diameter value of Holes 1 to 4 to measure
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (3 to 4) [4]
Point [3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions

187
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement

5 [Yes] Performs the spindle orientation


during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Measurement position
2 Hole 1 Center X H Center position X coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate

4 Hole 1 Center Y
Coordinate
V Center position Y coordinate of Hole 1

Hole 2 Center X X Center position X coordinate of Hole 2


Coordinate
Hole 2 Center Y Y Center position Y coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate
Hole 3 Center X W Center position X coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate
Hole 3 Center Y Z Center position Y coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate
Hole 4 Center X C Center position X coordinate of Hole 4
Coordinate
Hole 4 Center Y S Center position Y coordinate of Hole 4
Coordinate
Work T (Turning)/M (Milling)
Setting Dest. U Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
set the measurement result to (*1)
Work Coordinate A Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X position
Work Coordinate B Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y position
Diagonal Cross I Target X coordinate of the cross point of a
Coordinate Value diagonal between Holes 1 and 3 and a diagonal
X between Holes 2 and 4
Diagonal Cross J Target Y coordinate of the cross point of a
Coordinate Value diagonal between Holes 1 and 3 and a diagonal
Y between Holes 2 and 4

188
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) K Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
Feed Back E  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
4
*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".
*2: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Cross of diagonals of four holes

The cross point of a diagonal Cross coordinates of diagonals to measure


between Holes 1 and 3 and a
diagonal between Holes 2 and 4 is Hole 1 Hole 2
measured.

Hole 4 Hole 3

189
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.8 WORKPIECE SETUP EXPANSION (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to Hole
Hole 1 center X coordinate H
1 Center X Coordinate (H) +
5 (Hole Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Hole diameter D / 2
radius) and Hole 1 Center Y ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
to the position of Height of measurement
position L
2 Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

4 3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ


2YHUVKRRWȖ
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The above steps (1) to (7) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

9) When the measurement is


Hole 1 Hole 2
finished for Hole 1, the tool
moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
Hole 4 Hole 3
10)Measurement is performed for
Holes 2 to 4 in the above order.

190
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-


AXIS DIRECTION)
2
G2360 Center of circle that passes three holes - coordinate
specification
The center coordinates of a circle that passes the center of three holes are
measured. The measurement result is stored in the macro variable. 2
Cycle data Description Default
value 4
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Hole Diameter D Diameter value of Holes 1 to 3 to measure
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (3 to 4) [4]
Point [3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Measurement position
Hole 1 Center X H Center position X coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate
Hole 1 Center Y V Center position Y coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate

191
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Hole 2 Center X X Center position X coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate

5 Hole 2 Center Y
Coordinate
Y Center position Y coordinate of Hole 2

Hole 3 Center X W Center position X coordinate of Hole 3


Coordinate
Hole 3 Center Y Z Center position Y coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate
2 Variable T (Turning)/M (Milling)
Setting Macro Var. T Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27265
4 Circle Center I Target X coordinate of the center position of a
Coordinate Value circle that passes the center of Holes 1 to 3
X
Circle Center J Target Y coordinate of the center position of a
Coordinate Value circle that passes the center of Holes 1 to 3
Y
OK Range(+/-) K Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back E  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Center of a circle that passes three holes

The center coordinates of a circle Center coordinates of circle to measure


that passes the center of three holes
are measured. Hole 1

Hole 2
Hole 3

192
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to Hole
1 Center X Coordinate (H) + Hole 1 center X coordinate H

(Hole Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Hole Diameter D / 2 2


radius) and Hole 1 Center Y ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
to the position of Height of measurement
position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb 2
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ 4
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The above steps (1) to (7) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

9) When the measurement is Hole 1


finished for Hole 1, the tool
moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction. Hole 2
Hole 3
10)Measurement is performed for
Holes 2 and 3 in the above order.

193
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

G2361 Cross of diagonals of four holes


The cross coordinates of diagonals that pass the center of four holes are measured.
The measurement result is stored in the macro variable.

5 Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference

2 (Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to


F)
Hole Diameter D Diameter value of Holes 1 to 4 to measure

4 Height of
Measurement
L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure

Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (3 to 4) [4]
Point [3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Measurement position
Hole 1 Center X H Center position X coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate
Hole 1 Center Y V Center position Y coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate
Hole 2 Center X X Center position X coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate
Hole 2 Center Y Y Center position Y coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate
Hole 3 Center X W Center position X coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate
Hole 3 Center Y Z Center position Y coordinate of Hole 3
Coordinate

194
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Hole 4 Center X C Center position X coordinate of Hole 4
Coordinate
Hole 4 Center Y
Coordinate
S Center position Y coordinate of Hole 4
2
Variable T (Turning)/M (Milling)
Setting Macro Var. T Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27266
Diagonal Cross I Target X coordinate of the cross point of a
Coordinate Value diagonal between Holes 1 and 3 and a diagonal 2
X between Holes 2 and 4
Diagonal Cross J Target Y coordinate of the cross point of a
Coordinate Value diagonal between Holes 1 and 3 and a diagonal 4
Y between Holes 2 and 4
OK Range(+/-) K Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back E  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Cross of diagonals of four holes

The cross point of a diagonal Cross coordinates of diagonals to measure


between Holes 1 and 3 and a
diagonal between Holes 2 and 4 is Hole 1 Hole 2
measured.

Hole 4 Hole 3

195
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to Hole
Hole 1 center X coordinate H
1 Center X Coordinate (H) +
5 (Hole Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Hole diameter D / 2
radius) and Hole 1 Center Y ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
to the position of Height of measurement
position L
2 Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

4 3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ


2YHUVKRRWȖ
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The above steps (1) to (7) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

9) When the measurement is


Hole 1 Hole 2
finished for Hole 1, the tool
moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
Hole 4 Hole 3
10)Measurement is performed for
Holes 2 to 4 in the above order.

196
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

G2362 Angle of line passing center of two holes


The angle of a line passing the center of two holes to X axis is measured. The
measurement result is stored in the macro variable.

Cycle data Description Default 2


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F) 2
Hole Diameter D Diameter value of Holes 1 to 4 to measure
Height of
Measurement
L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure 4
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (3 to 4) [4]
Point [3] Measure +/-X-axis and -Y-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-X-axis and +/-Y-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+X-axis direction: 0°, -X-axis
direction: 180°
+Y-axis direction: 270°, -Y-axis
direction: 90°
Measurement position
Hole 1 Center X H Center position X coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate
Hole 1 Center Y V Center position Y coordinate of Hole 1
Coordinate
Hole 2 Center X X Center position X coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate
Hole 2 Center Y Y Center position Y coordinate of Hole 2
Coordinate
Variable T (Turning)/M (Milling)
Setting Macro Var. W Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27264

197
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Angle of Line A Target angle of a line passing the center of Holes
1 and 2 to X axis

5 OK Range(+/-) K Setting range of the measurement result


 If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back E
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
2  If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
4 set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Angle of line passing center of two holes

The angle of a line passing the


center of Holes 1 and 2 to X axis is
Hole 2
measured.

Angle of line
to measure
X axis
Hole 1

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to Hole
Hole 1 center X coordinate H
1 Center X Coordinate (H) +
(Hole Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus Hole diameter D / 2
radius) and Hole 1 Center Y ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Coordinate (V).
Approach distance R
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
to the position of Height of measurement
position L
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

198
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle 2YHUVKRRWȖ
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at 2
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ


2YHUVKRRWȖ 2
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 4
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The above steps (1) to (7) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

9) When the measurement is


finished for Hole 1, the tool Hole 2
moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.
Hole 1
10)Measurement is performed for
Hole 2 in the above order.

199
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 4 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)
 4.9 SIMPLE MEASUREMENT (PROBE Z-AXIS DIRECTION)

2
4

200
MEASUREMENT 1

5 CYCLE (PROBE X-
AXIS DIRECTION)
2
3
4
5
5.1 CALIBRATION...................................................................................... 202
5.2
5.3
TOOL MEASUREMENT ....................................................................... 220
WORKPIECE SETUP........................................................................... 227
6
5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION ....................................................... 255
5.5
5.6
CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)..................................................... 275
WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE).......................................... 283
7
5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE) ...................... 289
A

201
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

5.1

5.1 CALIBRATION

5 G2100 Touch sensor position


When the reference tool is in the X-axis direction, the position of the tool
measurement touch sensor is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool
measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion

2 Measurement
Direc.
P Direction of the axis to measure
[+X] [-X][+Y] [-Y] [+Z] [-Z]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference (Tool Measurement A to D)
Reference Tool B X-axis direction length of the reference tool
Axis Direction
Length
Reference Tool R YZ-axis direction length of the reference tool
Radius
Specify K How to specify the measurement position [Setting
Measurement [Setting Value] Uses the position set in tool Value]
Position measurement calibration data
[Input] Uses the coordinates specified in
Measurement Positions XYZ
Measurement H X coordinate of the touch sensor to measure
Position X (only when [Input] is selected in Specify
Measurement Position)
Measurement V Y coordinate of the touch sensor to measure
Position Y (only when [Input] is selected in Specify
Measurement Position)
Measurement L Z coordinate of the touch sensor to measure
Position Z (only when [Input] is selected in Specify
Measurement Position)
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
touch sensor
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

202
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
Setting Dest. W How to set the measurement result [Compensati
[Compensation Value] Feeds back the result as
the compensation value
on Value]
2
(*1)
[Reference Value] Sets the result as the
reference value and sets 0 2
to the compensation value
Setting Axis I Axis used to set the measurement result
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK Range,
Range(+/-) it is not set because it is regarded as no error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or 5
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The feed back rate (%) is determined by the offset value in tool measurement
calibration data (touch sensor position). (See "5.2 Calibration Data".)

 Measurement motion (for -X-axis direction)

Clearance C
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
2YHUVKRRWȖ
from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (V) and
Measurement Position Z (L).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse 1st measurement
to the position of Clearance (C) in 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
the X-axis direction.
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
2nd measurement
4) The tool is retracted back to the 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

1st return amount β in rapid


traverse.
5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

203
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion (for +Z-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to Clearance C
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Measurement Position Y (V) and 2YHUVKRRWȖ
5 Measurement Position Z (L) -
Clearance (C).
1st measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to Measurement Position X (H).
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
overshoot γ is measured at 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
2 4) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd measurement
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
5 5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

G2101 Probe length


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the length of the probe is measured. The
measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Refer.Work Height D Reference workpiece height of a part contacted by
the probe
Measurement H Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement V Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
top plane of the reference workpiece
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

204
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back 2
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion 5
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Clearance C
2YHUVKRRWȖ
from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (H) and
Measurement Position Z (V). 1st measurement
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Clearance (C) in
the X-axis direction.
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
overshoot γ is measured at
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
moving speed f1 (1st
2nd measurement
measurement). Reference work height D
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

G2102 Stylus ball diameter


The Y-axis and Z-axis direction diameter of the stylus ball is measured. It is
performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result
is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

 Inmeasurement
G2102, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2162 Stylus
MEMO ball diameter".

205
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center Y H Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Z V Z coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
2 Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
5 Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-Y-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
directions
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

206
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of
from the current position to measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L
Approach Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
Approach center
2
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and Y coordinate H
Approach Center Z Coordinate
(V). 2
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement). Approach Return
4) The tool is retracted back to the
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
5
1st return amount β in rapid 2YHUVKRRWȖ
traverse.

5) The above steps (3) to (4) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P) (1st
measurement).
The tool moves to the next axis
at moving speed fa.
Calculated center coordinates
6) Based on the 1st measurement
result, the center coordinates are
calculated for the 2nd
measurement.
Return
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
7) The tool moves at moving speed DPRXQWȕ
fa to the position of the calculated
2YHUVKRRWȖ
center coordinates -β.
8) The range of β + γ is measured at Moving Measurement Speed (F) (2nd
measurement).
9) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.
10) The above steps (8) to (9) are repeated in order for the axes of Measurement
Points (P) (2nd measurement).
11) When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-
axis direction.

207
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

G2103 Stylus ball center offset A


The Y-axis and Z-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed
on the table. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement
5 calibration data".

• You need to enable the positioning (0° and 180°) of the spindle using M code by the

 spindle orientation function.


• In G2103, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
MEMO measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2163
Stylus ball center offset A".

2 Cycle data Description Default


value

5 Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center Y H Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Z V Z coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-Y-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
directions

208
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back 2
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
5
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of
from the current position to measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L
Approach Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
Approach center
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and Y coordinate H
Approach Center Z Coordinate
(V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) 0° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of
approach amount α + overshoot
γ is measured at moving speed Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ
f1 (1st measurement). DPRXQWȕ

4) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ


1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

209
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to Return
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
5 return amount β in rapid traverse.
DPRXQWȕ

2YHUVKRRWȖ
7) 180° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of β + γ again is measured again at Moving
Measurement Speed (F) (3rd measurement).
8) The tool is retracted back to return amount ε in rapid traverse.

9) The above steps (3) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).
2 The tool moves to the next axis
at moving speed fa.

5 10)When all the measurements are


finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2104 Stylus ball center offset B


The Y-axis and Z-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed
on the table. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement
calibration data".

• You need to place the center of the reference workpiece correctly to the determined

 coordinates on the table.


• In G2104, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
MEMO measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2164
Stylus ball center offset B".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center Y H Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate

210
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Approach Center Z V Z coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of
Measurement
L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
2
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
2
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-Y-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis

[4]
directions
Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
5
directions
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
from the current position to measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L
Approach Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter Approach center
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and Y coordinate H
Approach Center Z Coordinate
(V).

211
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


5 + overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement). Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 2YHUVKRRWȖ
traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed

2 (F) (2nd measurement).


Return
6) The tool is retracted back to the DPRXQWȕ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
2nd return amount ε in rapid
5 traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

7) The above steps (3) to (6) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).
The tool moves to the next axis
at moving speed fa.
8) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2105 Stylus ball diameter workpiece rotation


The rotation axis is positioned by rotating C axis or using the spindle orientation
function, and the diameter of the stylus ball is calculated from the average of the
calculation results of multiple points on the circumference. It is performed with the
reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result is reflected to
"workpiece measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center Y H Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate

212
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Approach Center Z V Z coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of
Measurement
L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
2
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
2
Initial angle N Angle of the first measurement point of C axis or
the spindle (-360 < N < 360)
Pitch angle M Interval between each measurement point of C 90
axis or the spindle (0 < N < 360)
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) (*1) 5
Point
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Measurement Points (P) is not entered, measurement is performed for each Pitch
Angle (M), starting from Starting Angle (N), and is repeated until it reaches the
entire circumference (360°).
*2: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

213
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

 Measurement motion (for C-axis rotation)

Approach distance R
1) C axis rotates to Starting Angle
Height of
(N). measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
5 2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Approach center
Y coordinate H
Approach Center Y Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and
Approach Center Z Coordinate (V).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).
2 4) The range of approach amount α
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
5 measurement). Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 2YHUVKRRWȖ
traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the Return
DPRXQWȕ
approach start point in rapid
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

8) C axis rotates only by Pitch Angle


(M).
9) The above steps (4) to (8) are
repeated as many times as
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

214
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

G2106 Stylus ball offset A workpiece rotation


The rotation axis is positioned by rotating C axis or using the spindle orientation
function, and the center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from the spindle
center are measured from the average of the calculation results of multiple points on
the circumference. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table. 2
The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

 You need to enable the positioning (0° and 180°) of the spindle using M code by the 2
spindle orientation function.
MEMO

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement
Cond.
Q Group number of the measurement condition to
reference 5
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center Y H Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Z V Z coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N Angle of the first measurement point of C axis or
the spindle (-360 < N < 360)
Pitch angle M Interval between each measurement point of C 90
axis or the spindle (0 < N < 360)
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) (*1)
Point

215
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
5 Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2 an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

5 *1: If Measurement Points (P) is not entered, measurement is performed for each Pitch
Angle (M), starting from Starting Angle (N), and is repeated until it reaches the
entire circumference (360°).
*2: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion (for C-axis rotation)

Approach distance R
1) C axis rotates to Starting Angle
Height of
(N). measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Approach center
Y coordinate H
Approach Center Y Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and
Approach Center Z Coordinate (V).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

4) 0° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of
approach amount α + overshoot
γ is measured at moving speed Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
f1 (1st measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

216
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to Return
return amount β in rapid traverse.
DPRXQWȕ
2
2YHUVKRRWȖ
8) 180° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of β + γ again is measured again at Moving
Measurement Speed (F) (3rd measurement). 2
9) The tool is retracted back to the approach start point in rapid traverse.

10)C axis rotates only by Pitch


Angle (M).
11)The above steps (4) to (10) are
repeated as many times as
Measurement Points (P).
12)When all the measurements are 5
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2107 Stylus ball offset B workpiece rotation


The rotation axis is positioned by rotating C axis or using the spindle orientation
function, and the center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from the spindle
center are measured from the average of the calculation results of multiple points on
the circumference. It is performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table.
The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center Y H Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Z V Z coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position

217
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height

5 Initial angle N Angle of the first measurement point of C axis or


the spindle (-360 < N < 360)
Pitch angle M Interval between each measurement point of C 90
axis or the spindle (0 < N < 360)
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) (*1)
Point
2 Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*2)
 If the measurement result is less than OK
5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Measurement Points (P) is not entered, measurement is performed for each Pitch
Angle (M), starting from Starting Angle (N), and is repeated until it reaches the
entire circumference (360°).
*2: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion (for C-axis rotation)

Approach distance R
1) C axis rotates to Starting Angle
Height of
(N). measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Approach center
Y coordinate H
Approach Center Y Coordinate
(H) + (Reference Work Diameter
D / 2 - α - stylus radius) and
Approach Center Z Coordinate (V).

218
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.1 CALIBRATION

3) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
2
measurement). Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ
2
DPRXQWȕ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 2YHUVKRRWȖ
traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the Return
DPRXQWȕ
approach start point in rapid
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ 5
8) C axis rotates only by Pitch Angle
(M).
9) The above steps (4) to (8) are
repeated as many times as
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

219
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

5 G2110 Milling tool measurement


When the reference tool is in the X-axis direction, the tool length direction length and
tool diameter direction length of the milling tool are measured. The measurement
result is reflected to "tool offset amount".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
2 Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc.
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference (Tool Measurement A to D)
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
touch sensor
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Specify X Axis H How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
X Axis Direction D X-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation

220
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
Specify Y Axis V How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically 2
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount 2
[Input +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
Y Axis Direction R Y-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/
Compensation
when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
5
Specify Z Axis L How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) as the shift
amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
Z Axis Direction Z Z-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item used to set the measurement result (*1)
T (Turning)/M J
(Milling)

221
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

2 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: When the tool geometry and wear compensation options are enabled, if the

5 measurement result is set to the geometry compensation amount, the wear


compensation amount is set to 0. If the measurement result is set to the wear
compensation amount, a difference between the original geometry compensation
amount and the measurement result is set.

 Measurement motion (measurement of tool length direction offset amount)

Clearance C
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
2YHUVKRRWȖ
to Measurement Positions YZ.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Clearance (C) in
the X-axis direction. 1st measurement

3) The range of Clearance (C) + 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ


overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 2nd measurement
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement


Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

222
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

 Measurement motion (measurement of tool diameter direction offset


amount)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
2
Clearance C
Return
Measurement Position X - DPRXQWȕ 2YHUVKRRWȖ
Clearance (C) and Measurement
Position Y.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
1st measurement 2
to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
overshoot γ is measured at Return
DPRXQWİ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd measurement
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 5
5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed f2 (2nd
measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

G2111 Turning tool measurement


When the reference tool is in the X-axis direction, the Z-axis direction length and X-
axis direction length of the turning tool are measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool offset amount".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc.
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference (Tool Measurement A to D)
Clearance C Distance from the measurement start point to the
touch sensor
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

223
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
Specify X Axis H How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions

5 Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset


amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets X Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (D) added to

2 the tool offset amount as the


shift amount
X Axis Direction D X-axis offset and compensation amount (only
5 Offset/
Compensation
when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)

Specify Y Axis V How to specify the shift amount of the touch


Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) as the
shift amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Y Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (R) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount
Y Axis Direction R Y-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Specify Z Axis L How to specify the shift amount of the touch
Direction Shift sensor and tool measurement positions
Amount [Auto] Refers to the tool offset
amount and automatically
sets the shift amount
[Offset +/-] Sets the tool offset amount
as the shift amount
[Input +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) as the shift
amount
[Compensation +/-] Sets Z Axis Direction Offset/
Compensation (Z) added to
the tool offset amount as the
shift amount

224
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

Cycle data Description Default


value
Z Axis Direction Z Z-axis offset and compensation amount (only
Offset/ when [Input +/-] or [Compensation +/-] is selected)
Compensation
Tool
2
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T measurement result is set
2
Setting I Item used to set the measurement result (*1)
Destination(T)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK Range,
Range(+/-) it is not set because it is regarded as no error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
5
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: When the tool geometry and wear compensation options are enabled, if the
measurement result is set to the geometry compensation amount, the wear
compensation amount is set to 0. If the measurement result is set to the wear
compensation amount, a difference between the original geometry compensation
amount and the measurement result is set.

 Measurement motion (measurement of -X-axis direction offset amount)

Clearance C
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
2YHUVKRRWȖ
to Measurement Positions YZ.
1st measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Clearance (C) in
the X-axis direction.
3) The range of Clearance (C) + 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
2nd measurement
measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement


Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

225
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.2 TOOL MEASUREMENT

 Measurement motion (measurement of +Z-axis direction offset amount)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to 1st measurement
Measurement Position X -
5 Clearance (C) and Measurement Return
DPRXQWȕ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Clearance C
Position Y.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to Measurement Position Z (L).
3) The range of Clearance (C) +
2nd measurement
overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement). Return
2 4) The tool is retracted back to the
DPRXQWİ

1st return amount β in rapid


traverse.
5 5) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

226
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2120 End face measurement (X-axis direction) 2


The position of the X-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".
2
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+X] [-X]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to 5
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
T (Turning)/M U set the measurement result to (*1)
(Milling)
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

227
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

2 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number

5 between "54" and "59".


If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Measurement motion (for -X-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R


2YHUVKRRWȖ
from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (V) and
Measurement Position Z (L).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Measurement 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ 1st measurement
Position X (H) - Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.
3) The range of Approach Distance (R) + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
5) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) When the measurement is 2nd measurement
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

228
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2121 End face measurement (Y-axis direction)


The position of the Y-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default 2


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
2
Direc. [+Y] [-Y]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement
Position Y
V Y coordinate of the position to measure
5
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
T (Turning)/M U set the measurement result to (*1)
(Milling)
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

229
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

2 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number

5 between "54" and "59".


If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Measurement motion (for +Y-axis direction)

+Y-axis direction
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V) and
Measurement Position Z (L) -
approach amount α. $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Measurement
Position X (H) + Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis 1st measurement
direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Measurement Position X (H).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
Approach distance R
5) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of
Approach Distance (R) in the X- 2nd measurement
axis direction.

230
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2122 End face measurement (Z-axis direction)


The position of the Z-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default 2


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
2
Direc. [+Z] [-Z]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement
Position Y
V Y coordinate of the position to measure
5
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
T (Turning)/M U set the measurement result to (*1)
(Milling)
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

231
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

2 recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number

5 between "54" and "59".


If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Measurement motion (for +Z-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R


from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (V) and $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
Measurement Position Z (L) - 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
approach amount α.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Measurement 1st measurement
Position X (H) + Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to
Measurement Position X (H).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
Approach distance R
5) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of
Approach Distance (R) in the X- 2nd measurement
axis direction.

232
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2123 Outside diameter circle measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the circle outside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece
coordinates system".
2
 In G2123, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2173
MEMO Outside diameter circle measurement". 2

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
5
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-Y-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
directions
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°

233
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
5 Value Y
T (Turning)/M
A position

(Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Z coordinate of the measurement
Value Z B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

2 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
5 Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Outside diameter D / 2
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
from the current position to
Center Y coordinate H
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α +
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V). Height of
measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ

234
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

4) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed f1


(1st measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed 2
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
2YHUVKRRWȖ
2
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ Return
DPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement position L
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P). 5

G2124 Inside diameter circle measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the circle inside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece
coordinates system".

 Inmeasurement
G2124, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2174 Inside
MEMO diameter circle measurement".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates

235
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement

5 Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-Y-axis directions

2 [3] Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis


directions
[4] Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
directions
5 Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y A position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Z coordinate of the measurement
Value Z B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)

236
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.
5
 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of
from the current position to measurement
position L Inside diameter D / 2
Center Y Coordinate (H) + ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(Inside Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus
Approach center
radius) and Center Z Coordinate Y coordinate H
(V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in
the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
Approach
4) The range of approach amount α DPRXQWĮ
Return
DPRXQWȕ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st 2YHUVKRRWȖ
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
6) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Return
7) The tool is retracted back to the DPRXQWȕ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

237
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse to Center Y Coordinate (H).

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).
5 10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2125 Outside width measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the projection width is
2 measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


5 value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [Y-Axis] [Z-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Projection Width D Original length of the projection width
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Z if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Inclination angle M
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M J position
(Milling)

238
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (measurement of Y-axis direction)


5
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Projection Width D / 2
from the current position to ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
(Projection Width D / 2 + α + Center Y
coordinate H
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
measurement
to the position of Height of position L Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement). 2YHUVKRRWȖ

4) The tool is retracted back to the


Return
1st return amount β in rapid DPRXQWȕ $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ

2nd return amount ε in rapid


traverse. Return 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
DPRXQWİ

239
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-
5 axis direction.
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the center coordinates, and Height of
measurement
the above steps (1) to (6) are position L
Approach distance R
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the projection.

G2126 Inside width measurement


2
When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the groove width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".
5
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [Y-Axis] [Z-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Groove width D Original value of the groove width
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Z if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Inclination angle M

240
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
J position
2
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Feed Back Y
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
5
 Measurement motion (measurement of Y-axis direction)

Height of Approach distance R


1) The tool moves in rapid traverse measurement
from the current position to position L
Center Y Coordinate (H) + Groove Width D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(Groove Width D / 2 - α - stylus
radius) and Center Z Coordinate Center Y
coordinate H
(V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
4) The tool is retracted back to the 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

241
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
5 2nd return amount ε in rapid 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
traverse.
2YHUVKRRWȖ

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the center coordinates, and
the above steps (1) to (6) are
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the groove.
2 8) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach
5 Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2127 Outside corner measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the angle of the outside corner (opposite
side of the measurement position) of the XY plane is measured. The measurement
result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement Motion 1
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
2nd Measurement X X coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position X position
2nd Measurement Z Y coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position Y position
3rd Measurement A X coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position X position
3rd Measurement B Y coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position Y position
4th Measurement C X coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position X position

242
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
4th Measurement D Y coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position Y position
Measurement Motion 2
2
1st Measurement M 1st and 2nd measurement direction
Direction
3rd Measurement P 3rd and 4th measurement direction 2
Direction
Corner X U X coordinate of the corner
Coordinate
Corner Y E Y coordinate of the corner
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point 5
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
set the measurement result to (*1)
Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X position
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y position
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

243
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting Macro Var. T Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27246

5 *1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

 Corner outside measurement


2 The angle of the outside corner

Measurement position
(opposite side of the measurement Corner angle Measurement
position) is measured. position
5
to measure

Corner angle to measure


Measurement position

 Measurement motion

1) (If the 1st measurement position


is in the +X-axis direction) The
tool moves in rapid traverse from $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
the current position to 1st
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position X (H) -
approach amount α and
Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V).
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Approach distance R
6) The tool is retracted back to the
Height of measurement
2nd return amount ε in rapid position L
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

244
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

7) When the measurement is finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position
of Height of Measurement Position (L) - Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction.
8) The above steps (1) to (7) are repeated to measure the 2nd to 4th positions.

2
G2128 Inside corner measurement
When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the angle of the inside corner 2
(measurement position side) of the XY plane is measured. The measurement result
is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement Motion 1
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
5
F)
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position X position
1st Measurement V Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
2nd Measurement X X coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position X position
2nd Measurement Z Y coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position Y position
3rd Measurement A X coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position X position
3rd Measurement B Y coordinate of the 3rd measurement start
Start Position Y position
4th Measurement C X coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position X position
4th Measurement D Y coordinate of the 4th measurement start
Start Position Y position
Measurement Motion 2
1st Measurement M 1st and 2nd measurement direction
Direction
3rd Measurement P 3rd and 4th measurement direction
Direction
Corner X U X coordinate of the corner
Coordinate
Corner Y E Y coordinate of the corner
Coordinate

245
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement

5 Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Dest. W Number of the workpiece origin offset amount to
set the measurement result to (*1)
2 Work Coordinate I Workpiece X coordinate of the measurement
Value X position
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
5 Value Y position
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
Setting Macro Var. T Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
measurement result No.27246

*1: If Setting Destination is workpiece coordinates system G54 to G59, enter a number
between "54" and "59".
If Setting Destination is an additional pair of workpiece coordinates system, enter
as follows:
(Input example) For G54.1P1: Enter "1001".
(Input example) For G54.1P48: Enter "1048".

246
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

 Corner inside measurement

The angle of the inside corner

Measurement position
(measurement position side) is Measurement
position
measured.

Corner angle
2
to measure

Corner angle Measurement position


to measure
2
 Measurement motion

1) (If the 1st measurement position


is in the +X-axis direction) The
tool moves in rapid traverse from $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
the current position to 1st
Measurement Position X (H) -
2YHUVKRRWȖ
5
approach amount α and
Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V).
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
Approach distance R
5) The range of β + γ is measured
Height of measurement
at Moving Measurement Speed position L
(F) (2nd measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
6) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.
7) When the measurement is finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position
of Height of Measurement Position (L) - Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis
direction.
8) The above steps (1) to (7) are repeated to measure the 2nd to 4th positions.

247
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

G2129 Workpiece angle measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the workpiece angle of the XY plane is
measured. With the angle obtained from the measurement as the Z-axis rotation
angle, G68 (coordinate rotation) is performed.
5
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+X] [-X] [+Y] [-Y]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference

2 (Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to


F)
1st Measurement H X coordinate of the 1st measurement start

5 Start Position X
1st Measurement V
position
Y coordinate of the 1st measurement start
Start Position Y position
Angle of rotation A Workpiece inclination when +X axis is 0°
2nd Measurement C X coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position X position
2nd Measurement D Y coordinate of the 2nd measurement start
Start Position Y position
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Workpiece
Setting Macro Var. W Number of the macro variable storing the Parameter
T (Turning)/M U measurement result No.27246
(Milling)
Rotation center X X coordinate of the rotation center for coordinate
coordinates X I rotation
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
Rotation center Z Y coordinate of the rotation center for coordinate
coordinates Y J rotation
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)

248
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Workpiece angle measurement

The inclination angle of the


5
workpiece is measured.

Measurement position Worpiece angle


to measure

 Measurement motion

1) (If the 1st measurement position


is in the -X-axis direction) The
tool moves in rapid traverse from $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
the current position to 1st
2YHUVKRRWȖ
Measurement Position X (H) -
approach amount α and
Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V).
Height of measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
to the position of Height of
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).

249
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

4) The tool is retracted back to the


1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
Approach distance R
5) The range of β + γ is measured
5 at Moving Measurement Speed
Height of measurement
position L
(F) (2nd measurement).
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
6) Move the two axes X and Y
simultaneously to the positions specified in "2nd Meas.Strt Pt.X" and "2nd
Meas.Strt Pt.Y", respectively.
7) The above steps (3) to (5) are repeated to measure the 2nd position.
8) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

2 9) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

5 G2131 C-axis phase outside width measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the C-axis center angle of the projection
width is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates
system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement V Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Center Angle A Original center angle of the projection width
Angle Range of C Center angle of the measurement range
Measurement
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

250
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
J position
2
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Feed Back Y
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
5
 Measurement motion

C axis
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (H) and
Measurement Position Z (V).
Height of measurement
2) C-axis rotates to Center Angle position L Approach distance R
(A) - Angle Range of
Measurement (C).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Angle range of
to the position of Height of measurement C
Measurement Position (L) + Center angle A
Approach Distance (R) in the X-
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).

4) Angle Range of Measurement


(C) is measured at moving speed
f1 in the +C-axis direction (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid traverse.
6) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) in the +C-axis direction (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

251
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X- Height of measurement

5 axis direction. position L


Approach distance R

9) C-axis rotates to Center Angle Center angle A


(A) + Angle Range of Angle range of
Measurement (C), and the above measurement C
steps (3) to (8) are repeated in
the -C-axis direction.

2
5 G2132 C-axis phase inside width measurement
When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the C-axis center angle of the groove width
is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates
system".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement V Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Center Angle A Original center angle of the groove width
Angle Range of C Center angle of the measurement range
Measurement
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

252
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

Cycle data Description Default


value
Workpiece
Work Coord.Value I Workpiece coordinates of the measurement
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
J position
2
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Feed Back Y
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).
5
 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse C axis

from the current position to


Measurement Position Y (H) and
Measurement Position Z (V). Height of
measurement
2) C-axis rotates to Center Angle position L Approach distance R
(A).
3) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of Angle range of
measurement C
Measurement Position (L) +
Center angle A
Approach Distance (R) in the X-
axis direction and then moves at
moving speed fb to Height of
Measurement Position (L).

4) Angle Range of Measurement


(C) is measured at moving speed
f1 in the +C-axis direction (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
6) The range of return amount β + overshoot γ is measured at Moving Measurement
Speed (F) in the +C-axis direction (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 2nd return amount ε in rapid traverse.

253
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.3 WORKPIECE SETUP

8) C-axis rotates to Center Angle


(A), and the above steps (4) to
(7) are repeated in the -C-axis
direction.
5
9) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) - Height of measurement
position L Approach distance R
Approach Distance (R) in the X-
axis direction.

2
5

254
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

G2140 End face measurement (X-axis direction) 2


The position of the X-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool management data".
2
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+X] [-X]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to 5
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during measurement
Measurement
Speed
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)

255
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK

5 Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only

2 recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (for -X-axis direction)


5 Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
2YHUVKRRWȖ
from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (V) and
Measurement Position Z (L).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Measurement 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ 1st measurement
Position X (H) + Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.
3) The range of Approach Distance (R) + overshoot γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) When the measurement is 2nd measurement
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

256
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

G2141 End face measurement (Y-axis direction)


The position of the Y-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default 2


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
2
Direc. [+Y] [-Y]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement
Position Y
V Y coordinate of the position to measure
5
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during measurement
Measurement
Speed
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

257
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

 Measurement motion (for +Y-axis direction)

+Y-axis direction
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
from the current position to Approach distance R
Measurement Position Y (V) and
5 Measurement Position Z (L) -
approach amount α. $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Measurement
Position X (H) + Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis 1st measurement
direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Measurement Position X (H).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
2 moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5 5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
Approach distance R

(F) (2nd measurement).


5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
7) When the measurement is 2nd measurement
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Measurement Position X (H) - Approach Distance (R) in
the X-axis direction.

G2142 End face measurement (Z-axis direction)


The position of the Z-axis direction end face is measured. The measurement result is
reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [+Z] [-Z]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Measurement H X coordinate of the position to measure
Position X
Measurement V Y coordinate of the position to measure
Position Y

258
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement L Z coordinate of the position to measure
Position Z
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
2
Moving F Axis feedrate during measurement
Measurement
Speed
2
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result 5
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (for +Z-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Approach distance R


from the current position to
Measurement Position Y (V) and $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
Measurement Position Z (L) - 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
approach amount α.
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Measurement 1st measurement
Position X (H) + Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to
Measurement Position X (H).
3) The range of approach amount α + overshoot γ - stylus radius r is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st measurement).
4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

259
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Approach distance R
5) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Return amount İ
6) The tool is retracted back to the
5 2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
2nd measurement
7) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Measurement Position
X (H) - Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2143 Outside diameter circle measurement


2 When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the circle outside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".
5
• In G2143, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2183
 •
Outside diameter circle measurement".
In G2143, measurement is performed by moving the probe. To perform
MEMO
measurement by rotating the workpiece (C axis), see "G2153 Outside diameter
circle measurement (workpiece rotation)".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

260
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2]
[3]
Measure +/-Y-axis directions
Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis 2
directions
[4] Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
directions 2
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Tool 5
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

261
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

 Measurement motion

Outside diameter D / 2
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
from the current position to
Center Y coordinate H
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
5 (Outside Diameter D / 2 + α +
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V). Height of
measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


2 Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

4) The range of approach amount α


5 + overshoot γ is measured at
Approach
DPRXQWĮ
Return
DPRXQWȕ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ Return
DPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement position L
to the position of Height of Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).

262
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

G2144 Inside diameter circle measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the circle inside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".
2
• In G2144, measurement is performed using +/-Y axis and +/-Z axis. For
measurement using a specific angle or three-point measurement, see "G2184
 Inside diameter circle measurement". 2
MEMO
• In G2144, measurement is performed by moving the probe. To perform
measurement by rotating the workpiece (C axis), see "G2154 Inside diameter circle
measurement (workpiece rotation)".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4) [4]
Point [1] Measure +Y-axis direction only
[2] Measure +/-Y-axis directions
[3] Measure +/-Y-axis and -Z-axis
directions
[4] Measure +/-Y-axis and +/-Z-axis
directions

263
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement

5 [Yes] Performs the spindle orientation


during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
SettingWorkpieceTool

2 Compensation No. W
T (Turning)/M U
Tool offset amount number to which the
measurement result is set
(Milling)

5 Setting Dest.
T (Turning)/M
I
J
Item of the tool offset used to set the
measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center X
Coordinate and Center Y Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of
from the current position to measurement
position L Inside diameter D / 2
Center Y Coordinate (H) + ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(Inside Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus
Approach center
radius) and Center Z Coordinate Y coordinate H
(V).

264
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
2
Approach
4) The range of approach amount α Return

2
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st 2YHUVKRRWȖ
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
Return
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid
DPRXQWȕ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
5
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse to Center Y Coordinate (H).

9) The above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order for the axes of
Measurement Points (P).
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height
of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2145 Outside width measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the projection width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [Y-Axis] [Z-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Projection Width D Original length of the projection width

265
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the
coordinates projection width

5 (Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the


Z-axis direction)
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Z if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position

2 Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point


to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement

5 Measurement
Speed
Inclination angle M
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

266
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

 Measurement motion (measurement of Y-axis direction)

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


Projection Width D / 2
from the current position to ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
(Projection Width D / 2 + α + Center Y
coordinate H
2
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of 2
measurement
to the position of Height of position L Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement). 2YHUVKRRWȖ 5
4) The tool is retracted back to the
Return
1st return amount β in rapid DPRXQWȕ $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ

2nd return amount ε in rapid


traverse. Return 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
DPRXQWİ

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-
axis direction.
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the center coordinates, and Height of
measurement
the above steps (1) to (6) are position L
Approach distance R
repeated to measure the
opposite side of the projection.

267
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

G2146 Inside width measurement


When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the groove width is
measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".

5 Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement P Direction of the axis to measure
Direc. [Y-Axis] [Z-Axis]
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to

2 Groove width D
F)
Original value of the groove width
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the
5 coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Y if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the
coordinates projection width
(Measurement Position Z if measurement is in the
Z-axis direction)
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Inclination angle M
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)

268
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

 Measurement motion (measurement of Y-axis direction)

Height of Approach distance R


5
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse measurement
from the current position to position L
Center Y Coordinate (H) + Groove Width D / 2
ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(Groove Width D / 2 - α - stylus
radius) and Center Z Coordinate Center Y
coordinate H
(V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb
to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
4) The tool is retracted back to the 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ 5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
traverse.
2YHUVKRRWȖ

269
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the center coordinates, and
the above steps (1) to (6) are
repeated to measure the
5 opposite side of the groove.
8) When the measurement is
finished, the tool moves in rapid
traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach
Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2153 Outside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rota-


2 tion)
When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the circle outside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
5 data".

 Inmeasurement
G2153, measurement is performed by rotating the workpiece (C axis). To perform
by moving the probe, see "G2143 Outside diameter circle
MEMO measurement".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed

270
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Tool
2
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
2
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
5
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Outside diameter D / 2
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
from the current position to
Center Y Coordinate H
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α +
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V). Height of
measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position LApproach distance R
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st 2YHUVKRRWȖ
measurement).
Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ

271
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

4) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement). 2YHUVKRRWȖ

5 6) The tool moves in rapid traverse Return


DPRXQWȕ
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

7) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the center coordinates,
the workpiece (C axis) rotates by
Pitch Angle (M) as many times as

2 Measurement Points (P), and the


above steps (1) to (6) are Pitch angle M
repeated in order.

5 8) When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-
axis direction.

G2154 Inside diameter circle measurement (workpiece rota-


tion)
When the probe is in the X-axis direction, the center position of the circle inside
diameter is measured. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management
data".

 Inmeasurement
G2154, measurement is performed by rotating the workpiece (C axis). To perform
by moving the probe, see "G2144 Inside diameter circle
MEMO measurement".

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates

272
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

Cycle data Description Default


value
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
2
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
2
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Tool
Compensation No. W
T (Turning)/M U
Tool offset amount number to which the
measurement result is set 5
(Milling)
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Height of
from the current position to measurement Inside diameter D / 2
Approach Center Y Coordinate position L ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(H) and Approach Center Z
Approach center
Coordinate (V). Y coordinate H

273
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.4 POST MACHINING INSPECTION

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) The range of approach amount α


5 + overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement). Approach Return
DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
4) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid 2YHUVKRRWȖ
traverse.

5) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed

2 (F) (2nd measurement).


Return
DPRXQWȕ

5 2YHUVKRRWȖ

6) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the center coordinates,
the workpiece (C axis) rotates by
Pitch Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the
above steps (1) to (5) are
repeated in order.
Pitch angle M
7) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

274
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

G2162 Stylus ball diameter 2


The diameter of the stylus ball is measured at a specific angle. Since the
measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is possible. It
is performed with the reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement
2
result is reflected to "workpiece measurement calibration data".

 +/-X
In G2162, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2102 Stylus ball diameter".
MEMO

Cycle data Description Default


value
5
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

275
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
5 Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
2 an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

5 *1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Height of
Measurement Position (L) + measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L
Approach Distance (R) in the Z- ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Reference Work
Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

276
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ 2
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.
2

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
2nd return amount ε in rapid 5
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the approach center
coordinates, the direction
changes by Pitch Angle (M) as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
many times as Measurement
Points (P), and the above steps
(3) to (7) are repeated in order.
Pitch angle M
9) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

G2163 Stylus ball center offset A


The X-axis and Y-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured at a specific angle. Since the measurement angle
can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is possible. It is performed with the
reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result is reflected to
"workpiece measurement calibration data".

• You need to enable the positioning (0° and 180°) of the spindle using M code by the
 spindle orientation function.
• In G2163, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
MEMO
+/-X axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2103 Stylus ball center offset A".

277
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach Center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
Approach Center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
Coordinate
2 Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
5 Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range(+/-) Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

278
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y 2
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of
Approach distance R
Height of
2
Measurement Position (L) + measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Reference Work
Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

4) 0° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of 5
approach amount α + overshoot
γ is measured at moving speed
f1 (1st measurement). $SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
5) The tool is retracted back to the
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured 2YHUVKRRWȖ
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to
return amount β in rapid traverse.
8) 180° spindle orientation is
performed, and the range of β + γ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
is measured again at moving speed f2 (3rd measurement).
9) The tool is retracted back to return amount ε in rapid traverse.
10)The tool moves in rapid traverse
back to the approach center
coordinates, the direction
changes by Pitch Angle (M) as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
many times as Measurement
Points (P), and the above steps
(3) to (9) are repeated in order. Pitch angle M

279
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

11)When all the measurements are finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the
position of Height of Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction.

5 G2164 Stylus ball center offset B


The X-axis and Y-axis direction center of the stylus ball and the offset amount from
the spindle center are measured at a specific angle. Since the measurement angle
can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is possible. It is performed with the
reference workpiece placed on the table. The measurement result is reflected to
"workpiece measurement calibration data".

• You need to place the center of the reference workpiece correctly to the determined
2  coordinates on the table.
MEMO
• In G2164, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
+/-X axis and +/-Y axis, see "G2104 Stylus ball center offset B".
5
Cycle data Description Default
value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Base Work D Diameter of the reference workpiece
Diameter
Approach center X H X coordinate of the measurement start position
coordinate
Approach center Y V Y coordinate of the measurement start position
coordinate
Height of L Z-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R Z-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

280
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Setting
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
Feed Back Y  If the measurement result is less than OK
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
2
Range(+/-)
error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back 2
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: There are two directions of the stylus ball diameter: first axis direction and second
axis direction. The diameter obtained from this measurement result is compared
5
with each direction. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement
result is not set.

 Measurement motion

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to
Approach Center X Coordinate
(H) and Approach Center Y
Coordinate (V).
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + measurement Reference work diameter D / 2
position L ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
Approach Distance (R) in the Z-
axis direction and then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement
Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Reference Work
Diameter D / 2 - α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

281
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.5 CALIBRATION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

4) The range of approach amount α


+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5 5) The tool is retracted back to the
$SSURDFKDPRXQWĮ
2YHUVKRRWȖ
1st return amount β in rapid
traverse.

5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
5HWXUQDPRXQWȕ
6) The range of β + γ is measured
2 at Moving Measurement Speed
2YHUVKRRWȖ

(F) (2nd measurement).

5 7) The tool is retracted back to the


2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse.
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ

8) The tool moves in rapid traverse


back to the approach center
coordinates, the direction
changes by Pitch Angle (M) as Pitch angle M Starting angle N
many times as Measurement
Points (P), and the above steps
(3) to (7) are repeated in order. Pitch angle M
9) When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the Z-axis direction.

282
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC


ANGLE)
2
G2173 Outside diameter circle measurement
The center position of the circle outside diameter is measured at a specific angle. 2
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

 +/-Y
In G2173, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
axis and +/-Z axis, see "G2123 Outside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

Cycle data Description Default 5


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

283
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement

5 [Yes] Performs the spindle orientation


during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y A position
T (Turning)/M
2 (Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Z coordinate of the measurement
Value Z B position
5 T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Outside diameter D / 2
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
from the current position to
Center Y coordinate H
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α +
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V). Height of
measurement
position L Approach distance R

284
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement Position
(L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and then moves at moving
speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed. 2YHUVKRRWȖ
2
4) The range of approach amount α
2
Approach Return
+ overshoot γ is measured at DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

6) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the
5
2YHUVKRRWȖ
2nd return amount ε in rapid
Return Return
traverse. DPRXQWȕ DPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of measurement
to the position of Height of position L
Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.
Pitch angle M
9) The tool moves in rapid traverse
back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the
Pitch angle M
above steps (1) to (8) are
repeated in order. Starting angle N
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

G2174 Inside diameter circle measurement


The center position of the circle inside diameter is measured at a specific angle.
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "workpiece coordinates system".

 +/-Y
In G2174, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
axis and +/-Z axis, see "G2124 Inside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

285
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
5 Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
2 Measurement
Position

5 Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point


to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height
Workpiece
Work Coordinate I Workpiece Y coordinate of the measurement
Value Y A position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
Work Coordinate J Workpiece Z coordinate of the measurement
Value Z B position
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)

286
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back
Range(+/-)
Y
E
Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
error. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set. 2
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate.
If an alarm occurs on one of them, however, the measurement result is not set.
5
 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
from the current position to measurement
position L Inside diameter D / 2
Approach Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(H) and Approach Center Z
Approach center
Coordinate (V). Y coordinate H

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Inside Diameter D / 2
- α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.
4) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle
Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
Approach
5) The range of approach amount α DPRXQWĮ
Return
DPRXQWȕ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st 2YHUVKRRWȖ
measurement).
6) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

287
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.6 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

7) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
8) The tool is retracted back to the Return
5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
5 2nd return amount ε in rapid
DPRXQWȕ

traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

Pitch angle M
9) The tool moves in rapid traverse
back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the
above steps (1) to (8) are

2 repeated in order. Pitch angle M


Starting angle N
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
5 Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

288
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPE-


CIFIC ANGLE)
2
G2183 Outside diameter circle measurement
The center position of the circle outside diameter is measured at a specific angle. 2
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".

 +/-Y
In G2183, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
axis and +/-Z axis, see "G2143 Outside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

Cycle data Description Default 5


value
Measurement motion
Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
F)
Outer diameter D Original outside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point

289
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement

5 [Yes] Performs the spindle orientation


during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M U measurement result is set
(Milling)
2 Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M J measurement result
(Milling)
5 OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs.
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Outside diameter D / 2
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
from the current position to
Center Y coordinate H
Center Y Coordinate (H) +
(Outside Diameter D / 2 + α +
stylus radius) and Center Z
Coordinate (V). Height of
measurement
2) The tool moves in rapid traverse position L
Approach distance R
to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).

290
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

3) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

4) The range of approach amount α


2
Approach Return
+ overshoot γ is measured at DPRXQWĮ DPRXQWȕ
moving speed f1 (1st
measurement).
5) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse. 2
6) The range of β + γ is measured
at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
7) The tool is retracted back to the 2YHUVKRRWȖ
2nd return amount ε in rapid
Return Return
traverse. DPRXQWȕ DPRXQWİ
8) The tool moves in rapid traverse
to the position of Height of
Height of measurement
position L
5
Approach distance R
Measurement Position (L) +
Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.
Pitch angle M
9) The tool moves in rapid traverse
back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the
Pitch angle M
above steps (1) to (8) are
repeated in order. Starting angle N
10)When all the measurements are
finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

291
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

G2184 Inside diameter circle measurement


The center position of the circle inside diameter is measured at a specific angle.
Since the measurement angle can be specified, circular arc angle measurement is
possible. The measurement result is reflected to "tool management data".
5
 In+/-YG2184, measurement is performed by setting the angle. For measurement using
axis and +/-Z axis, see "G2144 Inside diameter circle measurement".
MEMO

Cycle data Description Default


value
Measurement motion
2 Measurement Q Group number of the measurement condition to
Cond. reference
(Workpiece Setup/Post Machining Inspection A to
5 F)
Inner diameter D Original inside diameter of the circle
Center Y H Original center position Y coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Center Z V Original center position Z coordinate of the circle
coordinates
Height of L X-axis direction height of the position to measure
Measurement
Position
Approach Distance R X-axis direction distance from the approach point
to the measurement position height
Initial angle N 1st measurement angle 0
Pitch angle M Angle between each measurement point 90
Moving F Axis feedrate during 2nd measurement
Measurement
Speed
Measurement P Number of measurement points (1 to 4)
Point
Spindle Orientation M [No] Does not perform the spindle
orientation during measurement
[Yes] Performs the spindle orientation
during measurement
+Y-axis direction: 0°, -Y-axis
direction: 180°
+Z-axis direction: 270°, -Z-axis
direction: 90°
Center Escape N
Height

292
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

Cycle data Description Default


value
Tool
Compensation No. W Tool offset amount number to which the
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
U measurement result is set
2
Setting Dest. I Item of the tool offset used to set the
T (Turning)/M
(Milling)
J measurement result
2
OK Range(+/-) S Setting range of the measurement result (*1)
K  If the measurement result is less than OK
Feed Back Y Range, it is not set because it is regarded as no
Range(+/-) E error.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to OK Range and is less than Feed Back
Range, the measurement result is set.
 If the measurement result is greater than or
equal to Feed Back Range, an alarm occurs. 5
 If both OK Range and Feed Back Range are
set to 0, the measurement result is not set, and
an alarm does not occur (the result is only
recorded in the measurement result list).

*1: The value obtained from this measurement result is compared with Center Y
Coordinate and Center Z Coordinate. If an alarm occurs on one of them, however,
the measurement result is not set.

 Measurement motion

Approach distance R
1) The tool moves in rapid traverse Height of
from the current position to measurement
position L Inside diameter D / 2
Approach Center Y Coordinate ĮVW\OXVUDGLXV
(H) and Approach Center Z
Approach center
Coordinate (V). Y coordinate H

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse


to the position of Height of
Measurement Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction and
then moves at moving speed fb to Height of Measurement Position (L).
3) The tool moves in the direction of Starting Angle (N) only by Inside Diameter D / 2
- α - stylus radius at moving speed fb.

4) If [Yes] is selected in Spindle


Orientation, the spindle
orientation is performed.
Approach
5) The range of approach amount α DPRXQWĮ
Return
DPRXQWȕ
+ overshoot γ is measured at
moving speed f1 (1st 2YHUVKRRWȖ
measurement).

293
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS DIRECTION)
 5.7 POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC ANGLE)

6) The tool is retracted back to the 1st return amount β in rapid traverse.

7) The range of β + γ is measured


at Moving Measurement Speed
(F) (2nd measurement).
5 8) The tool is retracted back to the Return
DPRXQWȕ 5HWXUQDPRXQWİ
2nd return amount ε in rapid
traverse. 2YHUVKRRWȖ

Pitch angle M
9) The tool moves in rapid traverse
back to the center coordinates,
the direction changes by Pitch
Angle (M) as many times as
Measurement Points (P), and the

2 above steps (1) to (8) are


repeated in order. Pitch angle M
Starting angle N
10)When all the measurements are
5 finished, the tool moves in rapid traverse to the position of Height of Measurement
Position (L) + Approach Distance (R) in the X-axis direction.

294
6 MEASUREMENT 1

CYCLE (OTHERS) 2
3
4
5
6.1 MODE SETTINGS ................................................................................ 296
6.2
6.3
RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL INFORMATION ........................ 298
SET-UP GUIDANCE USED IN A MULTI-PATH LATHE ...................... 301
6
6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING
COMMAND MODE ............................................................................... 302 7
A

295
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.1 MODE SETTINGS

6.1 MODE SETTINGS

5 G2090 Feedback OFF


G2091 Feedback ON
Feed back is turned on/off. If feed back is turned off, the measurement result is not
fed back even if it is within the feed back range.
• When the power is on or the machine is reset, feed back is turned on.

2
6

296
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.1 MODE SETTINGS

G2092 NG alarm mode OFF


G2093 NG alarm mode ON
The alarm is turned on/off. If the alarm is turned off, an alarm does not occur, and the
program continues to run even if the measurement result exceeds the feed back 2
range.

2
6

297
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.2 RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL INFORMATION

6.1

6.2 RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL


INFORMATION
5 Modal information is changed during execution of a measurement cycle and manual
measurement. The state of the information after the execution can be restored to the
state before the execution.

 When the parameter MDL (No. 27223#6) is set to 1, modal information is not
retracted and restored.
MEMO

Retracting/restoring modal information


Modal information listed below is restored.

2 • Feedrate F

• G code

6 G90/G91
G code
03
Group
Milling
Execution mode

G00/G01/G02/G03 01 Milling/Turning
G60 01 (depending on Milling/Turning
parameters)
G98/G99 (G94/G95) 05 Turning

When a measurement cycle is executed in each mode listed below, alarms occur.

 Turning mode

G code Group G code system Note


G32 01 A
G33 01 B, C
G34 01 A, B, C
G35 01 A, B, C
G36 01 A, B, C Depending on parameters
G71 01 A, B Depending on parameters
G72 01 A, B, C Depending on parameters
G73 01 A, B, C Depending on parameters
G74 01 A, B, C Depending on parameters
G75 01 C Depending on parameters
G90 01 A
G92 01 A
G94 01 A

298
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.2 RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL INFORMATION

G code Group G code system Note


G77 01 B
G78 01 B
G79 01 B
G20 01 C 2
G21 01 C
G24 01 C

 Milling mode

G code Group
G2.2 01
G3.2 01
G2.3 01
G3.3
G2.4
01
01
2
G3.4 01
G6.2 01 6
G33 01
G75 01
G77 01
G78 01
G79 01
G81.1 01

 Measurement motion
When the parameter No. 27223#5 is set to 1, the setting item [Clearance during
measurement cycle] appears on the measurement condition settings screen. A value
set for this item is used as travel distance during the 1st measurement to execute the
measurement cycle.

1) The tool moves in rapid traverse


from the current position to the
center X coordinate + ("inner
diameter" / 2 - "clearance during
measurement cycle" - "stylus ball
radius") in the X-axis direction,
and to the point specified in the
Clearance
center Y coordinate in the Y-axis
direction.

299
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.2 RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL INFORMATION

2) The tool moves in rapid traverse to the approach point (height of measurement
position + approach distance point) in the Z-axis direction.
3) The tool moves to the position specified in the height of measurement position in
the -Z-axis direction at the speed moving to the measurement start point in the

5 axis direction.
4) Measurement is executed at moving speed during the 1st measurement in the
range of (clearance during measurement cycle + overshoot during measurement)
(1st measurement).

2
6

300
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.3 SET-UP GUIDANCE USED IN A MULTI-PATH LATHE

6.3 SET-UP GUIDANCE USED IN A MULTI-


PATH LATHE
The set-up guidance can be used even in a multi-path system. 2
Function Description
Measurement cycle Measured data is fed back to the calibration data, workpiece
function coordinates offset amount, and tool offset amount of the path
selected during the execution.
Settings screen Measurement conditions and calibration data are set for each
path. Measurement conditions and calibration data of a
selected path are displayed on each settings screen.
Measurement result list The result of measurement executed in a selected path is
display screen displayed on the Measurement Result List Display screen.
Tool management function Tool management data is common to each path in a multi-path
system. Magazine management data is also common. Spindle
2
position and retract position data exist for each path.

301
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED


WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND
5 MODE
The following measurement functions can be used during tilted workplace machining
command mode:
• Work Setup

• Part Check

 •• Workpiece
Work setup C-axis phase outside width/inside width measurement cannot be used.
rotation measurement of post machining inspection cannot be used.
MEMO • Workpiece setting error amount measurement cannot be used.

2 A measurement image during tilted workplace machining command mode is shown


below.

6 Z
Y

Feature coordinates

 • ToForuseFANUC
this function, you need to have the following options:
Series 30i-MODEL B, 0i-MODEL F: Tilted workplace indexing
MEMO command (R522)

Work setup of the measurement cycle function


Work setup of the measurement cycle function can be used during tilted workplace
machining command mode.
The result of measurement executed during tilted workplace machining command
mode is not fed back to work coordinates. Instead, output of an incremental multiple
command shifts feature coordinates.

302
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

Input items depend on each work setup of the measurement cycle function.

Measure Input item (*1)


End face measurement (X- Measurement Direc.: Select the direction on feature
axis direction) coordinates.
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) Meas. Pos.: Enter the value on feature 2
End face measurement (Y-axis coordinates.
direction) Work Coord.Value: Enter the value on feature
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.
Setting Dest.(M): Not required (when a value is
End face measurement (Z-
input, it is ignored)
axis direction)
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction)
Outer diameter measurement Center Point: Enter the value on feature
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.
Inner diameter measurement Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.
Work Coord.Value: Enter the value on feature
coordinates. 2
Setting Dest.(M): Not required (when a value is
input, it is ignored)
Outer diameter width Measurement Direc.: Select the direction on feature 6
measurement coordinates.
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) Center Point: Enter the value on feature
Inner diameter width coordinates.
measurement Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.
Work Coord.Value: Enter the value on feature
coordinates.
Setting Dest.(M): Not required (when a value is
input, it is ignored)
Corner outside/inside Measurement Start Point: Enter the value on feature
measurement coordinates.
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) Measurement Direc.: Select the direction on feature
(*2) coordinates.
Corner Coordinate: Enter the value on feature
coordinates.
Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
coordinates.
Work Coord.Value: Enter the value on feature
coordinates.
Setting Dest.(M): Not required (when a value is
input, it is ignored)
Setting Macro Var.: Not required (when a value is
input, it is ignored)

303
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

Measure Input item (*1)


Slant workpiece angle Measurement Direc.: Select the direction on feature
measurement coordinates.
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) Measurement Start Point: Enter the value on feature
(*3) coordinates.
5 Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
coordinates.
Center of Rotation: Enter the value on feature
coordinates.
Setting Macro Var.: Not required (when a value is
input, it is ignored)

*1: Other input items are the same as those used in mode other than tilted workplace
machining command mode.
*2: The function is enabled when the parameter CNR (No. 27222#3) is set to 1.
*3: The function is enabled when the parameter CNR (No. 27222#2) is set to 1.

2
 Measurement motion

6 Measurement motion is the same as that produced in mode other than tilted
workplace machining command mode. The motion is produced on feature
coordinates.
1) Select MEM mode.
2) In the order listed below, execute commands before the G + 4-digit number block
of a measurement cycle in a machining program.
• Tilted workplace machining command (G68.2)

• Tool axial direction control command (G53.1)

• Tool length offset command

3) Execute the G + 4-digit number block of the measurement cycle.


• When the parameter No. 27220#6 is set to 1
The incremental multiple command (G68.4) is automatically output after the
measurement. This shifts feature coordinates.

 • After the incremental multiple command is output, the macro variable specified with
the parameter No. 27259 is initialized with NULL.
MEMO

• When the parameter No. 27220#6 is set to 0


The incremental multiple command (G68.4) is not output after the measurement.
Argument data of the incremental multiple command is stored in the macro variable
specified with the parameter No. 27259.

304
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

Post machining inspection of the measurement cycle function


Post machining inspection of the measurement cycle function can be used during
tilted workplace machining command mode.
As is the case with measurement executed in mode other than tilted workplace
machining command mode, an offset amount calculated from a measurement result
is fed back to a tool offset amount.
2
In post machining inspection of the measurement cycle function, input items depend
on each measurement.

Measure Input item (*1)


End face measurement (X- Measurement Direc.: Select the direction on feature
axis direction) coordinates.
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) Meas. Pos.: Enter the value on feature
End face measurement (Y-axis coordinates.
direction)
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction)
End face measurement (Z-
2
axis direction)
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction)
Outer diameter measurement Center Point: Enter the value on feature
6
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.
Inner diameter measurement Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.

Outer diameter width Center Point: Enter the value on feature


measurement coordinates.
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
Inner diameter width coordinates.
measurement
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction)
Outside width/inner width Center Point: Enter the value on feature
measurement (with inclination coordinates.
angle) Height of Meas.Pt.: Enter the value on feature
(probe Z-axis, X-axis direction) coordinates.
(*2)

*1: Other input items are the same as those used in mode other than tilted workplace
machining command mode.
*2: The function is enabled when the parameter GANG (No. 27220#5) is set to 1.
The function is enabled when the parameter NOY (No. 27222#7) is set to 1.

305
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

 Measurement motion
Measurement motion is the same as that produced in mode other than tilted
workplace machining command mode. The motion is produced on feature
coordinates.

5 1) Select MEM mode.


2) In the order listed below, execute commands before the G + 4-digit number block
of a measurement cycle in a machining program.
• Tilted workplace machining command (G68.2)

• Tool axial direction control command (G53.1)

• Tool length offset command

3) Execute the G + 4-digit number block of the measurement cycle.

Macro variable

2 When measurement is performed, argument data of the incremental multiple


command (G68.4) is set to the macro variable number specified with the parameter
No. 27259.
6 This allows you to output the incremental multiple command (G68.4) even using a
user macro.

G68.4 argument X Y Z I J K
address argument argument argument argument argument argument
data data data data data data
Macro variable number to n+0 n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 -
set
n: Value set to the parameter No. 27259

Argument data of the incremental multiple command to be set varies depending on


the measurement as shown below.

Measurement type X Y Z I J K
argument argument argument argument argument argument
data data data data data data
End face measurement ○ -
(X-axis direction)
End face measurement ○ -
(Y-axis direction)
End face measurement ○ -
(Z-axis direction)
Outer/inner diameter ○ ○
-
measurement
(X-Y plane)
Outer/inner diameter ○ ○
-
measurement
(Y-Z plane)

306
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

Measurement type X Y Z I J K
argument argument argument argument argument argument
data data data data data data
Outside/inside width -

measurement
(X-Y plane, X-axis 2
direction)
Outside/inside width -
measurement ○
(X-Y plane, Y-axis
direction)
Outside/inside width -
measurement ○
(Y-Z plane, Y-axis
direction)
Outside/inside width -
measurement ○
(Y-Z plane, Z-axis 2
direction)
Corner outside/inside -
measurement
○ ○
6
(X-Y plane)
Corner outside/inside -
○ ○
measurement
(Y-Z plane)
Slant workpiece angle -
○ ○ ○
measurement
(X-Y plane)
Slant workpiece angle -
○ ○ ○
measurement
(Y-Z plane)

〇:To be set

The macro variable value specified with the parameter No. 27259 is initialized with
NULL at the following timings:

 • Measurement cycle function


NOTE When measurement is performed
When feature coordinates are shifted (Parameter No. 27220#6 = 1)

Restrictions
There are the following restrictions on this function:
• It is available only for machining centers.

• It is available only for table rotation-type machines where the table rotation axis is controlled
by two axes.

307
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 6 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS)
 6.4 SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND MODE

2
6

308
7
1

MOTION SETTINGS 2
3
4
5
Measurement cycle settings are made on a setting screen before
measurement.
6
7.1 MAKING SETTINGS BEFORE MEASUREMENT................................ 310
7
A

309
B-64644EN-3/02
CHAPTER 7 MOTION SETTINGS
 7.1 MAKING SETTINGS BEFORE MEASUREMENT

7.1

7.1 MAKING SETTINGS BEFORE MEA-


SUREMENT
5 When measuring the probe length, set the machine coordinates of a plane on which
the reference workpiece is placed (top plane of the table). They are referred to during
probe length measurement.

<1>On Setting slide, select [Setup].

<2>Select [Measurement Cycle (Basic)].


The setting window of the measurement cycle function appears.

<3>Enter coordinate values and press <INPUT>.


This sets the machine coordinates of the plane where the reference workpiece is placed.

2  For details about the setting screen, see "6.4 SETTINGS" in "FANUC iHMI HOME
Screen OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64644EN)'.
MEMO

6
7

310
A
1

APPENDIX 2
3
4
5
A.1 ALARMS ............................................................................................... 312
6
7
A

311
B-64644EN-3/02
APPENDIX  A.1 ALARMS

A.1

A.1 ALARMS
If there is a data error in an input program, one or more parameter settings, or

1 measurement conditions, one of the following MC alarms occurs.

Table A.1 Causes and Actions for Alarms That Occur in Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i
2 Alarm No. Cause Action
3728 The specified starting angle is When positioning using the spindle

3 incorrect. orientation function, set a valid value in


"Starting Angle" so that it can be output with
the spindle orientation M code specified with
the parameter.
4 3729 The specified pitch angle is When positioning using the spindle
incorrect. orientation function, set a valid value in
"Pitch Angle" so that it can be output with the
5 spindle orientation M code specified with the
parameter.
3730 The set probe length is 0 or Perform calibration to measure the probe
6 less. length or input the probe length on the
calibration data setting screen.
3731 The set diameter of stylus ball Perform calibration to measure the stylus
7 in the X-axis direction is 0 or ball diameter or input the stylus ball diameter
less. on the calibration data setting screen.
3732 The set diameter of stylus ball Perform calibration to measure the stylus
A in the Y-axis direction is 0 or ball diameter or input the stylus ball diameter
less. on the calibration data setting screen.
3733 The offset amount of stylus Perform calibration to measure the stylus
position in the X-axis direction position offset value or input the stylus
is not set. position offset value on the calibration data
setting screen.
3734 The offset amount of stylus Perform calibration to measure the stylus
position in the Y-axis direction position offset value or input the stylus
is not set. position offset value on the calibration data
setting screen.
3735 The moving speed during the Set the moving speed during the 1st
1st measurement is 0 or less. measurement on the measurement condition
settings screen.
3736 The approach amount during Set the approach amount during the 1st
the 1st measurement is 0 or measurement on the measurement condition
less. settings screen.
3737 The moving speed during the Set the moving speed during the 2nd
2nd measurement is 0 or less. measurement on the measurement condition
settings screen.
3738 The overshoot during Set the overshoot during measurement on
measurement is 0 or less. the measurement condition settings screen.

312
B-64644EN-3/02
APPENDIX  A.1 ALARMS

Alarm No. Cause Action


3739 The speed moving to the Set the moving speed to the measurement
measurement start point is 0 start point on the measurement condition
or less. settings screen.
3740 The return amount after the
2nd contact is 0 or less.
Set the return amount after the 2nd contact
on the measurement condition settings
1
screen.
3741 The sensor signal position is
incorrect.
Check the sensor signal status.
2
3742 The probe did not contact the Change the measurement start point or
measurement position. check the approach amount. For automatic
measurement, check if the measurement
3
position of the measurement cycle is input.
3743 The probe contacted the
workpiece during approach in
Check if the measurement position of the
measurement cycle is input.
4
the axis direction.
3744 The return amount during the Set the return amount during the 1st
1st measurement (the 2nd measurement on the measurement condition
5
measurement distance) is 0 or settings screen.

3745
less.
The input value of the Check if the input value of the measurement
6
measurement condition is condition exceeds the number of groups that

3746
incorrect.
The input value of the
can be used.
Check the input value of the measurement
7
measurement direction is direction.

3750
incorrect.
The tool did not contact the Change the measurement start point or
A
sensor. check the approach amount. For automatic
measurement, check if the measurement
position of the measurement cycle is input.
3756 The measurement using Spindle orientation is an optional function.
spindle orientation function is When the spindle orientation option is
not possible. enabled, check the setting values in the
parameters No. 12390 to No. 12393.
3758 The measurement point is "Measurement Point" exceeds the upper
incorrect limit. Change it to an appropriate value.
3759 Positioning to the specified When positioning using the spindle
angle is not possible. orientation function, the spindle orientation M
code for positioning to the angle obtained
from "Starting Angle" and "Pitch Angle"
cannot be output. Specify a valid value so
that it can be output with the spindle
orientation M code specified with the
parameter.
3760 The number of the workpiece Check the input value of the workpiece
coordinates of the feedback coordinate number in the feedback
destination is not input. destination.

313
B-64644EN-3/02
APPENDIX  A.1 ALARMS

Alarm No. Cause Action


3761 The number of the workpiece Check the input value of the workpiece
coordinates of the feedback coordinate number in the feedback
destination is incorrect. destination.

1 3762 The number of the workpiece


coordinates of the feedback
Check the input value of the workpiece
coordinate number and the tool offset
destination and the option for number and setting destination in the
the tool offset is disabled. feedback destination.
2 3763 The workpiece coordinate Check if the workpiece coordinates (1st axis)
value (1st axis) is not input. are input.

3 3764 The workpiece coordinate


value (2nd axis) is not input.
Check if the workpiece coordinates (2nd
axis) are input.
3766 The axis specified in the Check the value input to “setting destination”
4 3767
feedback destination is invalid. of the feedback destination.
The tool offset number of the Check the input value of the tool offset
feedback destination is number in the feedback destination.
5 incorrect.
3768 The tool offset number of the Check the input value of the tool offset
feedback destination is number in the feedback destination.
6 incorrect.
3769 The input value of the Check the valid range and the input value of
feedback range is incorrect. the feedback range.
7 3770 The measurement result Check the input value of the feedback range
exceeded the feedback range. and the measurement result.
3771 The argument value of the Check if the number used to acquire the
A measurement result number is information in the measurement result list is
incorrect. input.
3772 The measurement result Check if the number used to acquire the
corresponding to the argument information in the measurement result list is
value of the measurement input.
result number is not found.
3777 Illegal tool management data Check if the tool management function
access. option is enabled and the function is running
correctly.
3778 Illegal macro variable access. Check if the macro variable numbers used in
the set-up guidance function are correctly
set. (Parameters No. 12381 to No. 12385)
3779 Illegal parameter access. Check if the parameters of the set-up
guidance function and the tool management
function are correctly set.
3780 Illegal tool offset access. Check if the offset amount can be correctly
read from and written to the specified tool.
3781 The specified tool number is Check if the tool number is input in the
not found. feedback destination.
3782 The specified group number is Check if the group number is input in the
not found. feedback destination.

314
B-64644EN-3/02
APPENDIX  A.1 ALARMS

Alarm No. Cause Action


3783 The value of the parameter Check if the parameter No. 14825 value is
No.14825 is incorrect. correctly set.
3784 The specified offset type is Check if the offset type is input in the

3785
incorrect.
The offset number and offset
feedback destination.
Check if both the offset number and the
1
type are specified offset type are input in the feedback

3786
simultaneously.
The tool number and group
destination.
Check if both the tool number and the group
2
are specified simultaneously. number are input in the feedback

3787 System error: control


destination.
If this alarm occurs, report the machining
3
command program description at the time of the alarm
and the alarm number to FANUC because
there may be an internal system problem.
4
3788 The tool number is illegal. Check if the tool number is input in the
feedback destination.
5
3789 The group number is illegal. Check if the group number is input in the
feedback destination.
3790 The offset type is illegal. Check if the offset type is input in the 6
feedback destination.
3791 System error: T/M If this alarm occurs, report the machining
program description at the time of the alarm 7
and the alarm number to FANUC because
there may be an internal system problem.
3792 System error: setting Check if the setting destination is input in the A
destination feedback destination.
3793 System error: setting condition Check if the setting condition is input in the
feedback destination.
3794 The offset number is illegal. Check if the offset number is input in the
feedback destination.
3795 System error: variable If this alarm occurs, report the machining
program description at the time of the alarm
and the alarm number to FANUC because
there may be an internal system problem.
3796 System error: memory If this alarm occurs, report the machining
program description at the time of the alarm
and the alarm number to FANUC because
there may be an internal system problem.
3797 The set value for the tool offset Check the maximum value of the NC
exceeds the allowable range. parameter No. 5013 "Tool wear offset
amount".

315
B-64644EN-3/02
APPENDIX  A.1 ALARMS

Alarm No. Cause Action


3798 When "Group Number" is On the life management data screen, check
specified as the setting if there is a tool whose life status is "Used" in
destination in post machining a group with the group number specified as
inspection, no tool whose life the feedback destination.
1 status is "Used" is found
during the feedback of the
measurement result.
2
3
4
5
6
7
A

316
B-64644EN-3/02

B-64644EN-3/02B-64644EN-3/02

INDEX 1

A G2020 End face measurement (X-axis 2


ABOUT THE CYCLE CREATION SCREEN ...... 10 direction) .......................................................... 108
ABOUT THE CYCLE SELECTION SCREEN ...... 5 G2021 End face measurement (Y-axis
ABOUT THE SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTION ... 2 direction) .......................................................... 110 3
ALARMS .......................................................... 312 G2022 End face measurement (Z-axis
direction) .......................................................... 112
APPENDIX ....................................................... 311
G2023 Outside diameter circle measurement .. 114 4
C G2024 Inside diameter circle measurement .... 116
CALIBRATION ................................................... 82 G2025 Outside width measurement ................. 119
Calibration (Specific Angle) ...................... 164, 275 G2026 Inside width measurement ................... 121 5
Changing the tier of soft keys displayed to G2027 Outside corner measurement ............... 123
the first ................................................................. 4 G2028 Inside corner measurement .................. 126
CREATING MACHINING CYCLE ........................ 1 G2029 Workpiece angle measurement ............ 128 6
Cycle category tab display in the cycle selection G2031 C-axis phase outside width
screen .................................................................. 6 measurement ................................................... 131
Cycle list display in the cycle selection screen .... 6 G2032 C-axis phase inside width 7
measurement ................................................... 133
D G2035 Workpiece setting error measurement (XY
Details on the Cycle Selection Screen ................. 5 plane) ............................................................... 135 8
G2036 Workpiece setting error measurement (YZ
E plane) ............................................................... 137
Editing Cycles .................................................... 15 G2037 Workpiece setting error measurement (ZX A1
EXECUTE MEASUREMENT SCREEN ............. 68 plane) ............................................................... 139
G2038 Workpiece setting error measurement
F (workpiece setting) ........................................... 140 A2
Face ................................................................... 28 G2040 End face measurement (X-axis
Flow of Measurement .......................................... 2 direction) .......................................................... 142
Function That Cannot Be Used Concurrently ...... 4 G2041 End face measurement (Y-axis Z
direction) .......................................................... 144
G G2042 End face measurement (Z-axis
G2000 Touch sensor position ............................ 82 direction) .......................................................... 145
G2001 Probe length ........................................... 84 G2043 Outside diameter circle measurement .. 147
G2002 Stylus ball diameter ................................ 85 G2044 Inside diameter circle measurement .... 149
G2003 Stylus ball center offset A ....................... 88 G2045 Outside width measurement ................. 152
G2004 Stylus ball center offset B ....................... 90 G2046 Inside width measurement ................... 154
G2005 Stylus ball diameter workpiece rotation .. 93 G2047 Slant measurement indexing cycle ....... 156
G2006 Stylus ball center offset A ....................... 95 G2053 Outside diameter circle measurement
G2007 Stylus ball offset B workpiece rotation ... 98 (workpiece rotation) .......................................... 158
G2010 Milling tool measurement ..................... 101 G2054 Inside diameter circle measurement
G2011 Turning tool measurement ................... 104 (workpiece rotation) .......................................... 161

i-1
B-64644EN-3/02

G2062 Stylus ball diameter ...............................164 G2146 Inside width measurement ................... 268
G2063 Stylus ball center offset A .....................166 G2153 Outside diameter circle measurement
G2064 Stylus ball center offset B .....................169 (workpiece rotation) ......................................... 270
G2073 Outside diameter circle measurement ..172 G2154 Inside diameter circle measurement
G2074 Inside diameter circle measurement .....174 (workpiece rotation) ......................................... 272
1 G2083 Outside diameter circle measurement ..178 G2162 Stylus ball diameter .............................. 275
G2084 Inside diameter circle measurement .....180 G2163 Stylus ball center offset A ..................... 277
2 G2090 Feed back OFF .....................................296 G2164 Stylus ball center offset B ..................... 280
G2091 Feed back ON .......................................296 G2173 Outside diameter circle measurement . 283
G2092 NG alarm mode OFF ............................297 G2174 Inside diameter circle measurement .... 285
G2093 NG alarm mode ON ..............................297 G2183 Outside diameter circle measurement . 289
3 G2100 Touch sensor position ...........................202 G2184 Inside diameter circle measurement .... 292
G2101 Probe length ..........................................204 G2320 Center of circle that passes three holes -
coordinate specification ................................... 184
4 G2102 Stylus ball diameter ...............................205
G2103 Stylus ball center offset A .....................208
G2321 Cross of diagonals of four holes ........... 187
G2360 Center of circle that passes three holes -
G2104 Stylus ball center offset B .....................210
coordinate specification ................................... 191
5 G2105 Stylus ball diameter workpiece rotation 212
G2361 Cross of diagonals of four holes ........... 194
G2106 Stylus ball offset A workpiece rotation ..215
G2362 Angle of line passing center of two
G2107 Stylus ball offset B workpiece rotation ..217 holes ................................................................ 197
6 G2110 Milling tool measurement ......................220
G2111 Turning tool measurement ....................223 I
G2120 End face measurement (X-axis Inner corner ........................................................ 43
7 direction) ...........................................................227 Inner diameter circle .......................................... 33
G2121 End face measurement (Y-axis Inner width ......................................................... 39
direction) ...........................................................229
Input Item Guidance Window Display in the Cycle
8 G2122 End face measurement (Z-axis Creation Screen ................................................. 12
direction) ...........................................................231
Input Item Help Display ...................................... 11
G2123 Outside diameter circle measurement ..233
Input Item Setting Value Display in the Cycle
A1 G2124 Inside diameter circle measurement .....235 Creation Screen ................................................. 12
G2125 Outside width measurement .................238
G2126 Inside width measurement ....................240 M
A2 G2127 Outside corner measurement ...............242 Machine Calibration ........................................... 55
G2128 Inside corner measurement ..................245 MAKING SETTINGS BEFORE
G2129 Workpiece angle measurement ............248 MEASUREMENT ............................................. 310
Z G2131 C-axis phase outside width MANUAL MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE 18
measurement ....................................................250 MEASUREMENT CONDITION INPUT
G2132 C-axis phase inside width SCREEN ............................................................ 25
measurement ....................................................252 MEASUREMENT CYCLE (OTHERS) .............. 295
G2140 End face measurement (X-axis MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE X-AXIS
direction) ...........................................................255 DIRECTION) .................................................... 201
G2141 End face measurement (Y-axis MEASUREMENT CYCLE (PROBE Z-AXIS
direction) ...........................................................257 DIRECTION) ...................................................... 81
G2142 End face measurement (Z-axis Measurement Cycle Menu ................................... 2
direction) ...........................................................258 Measurement Cycle Settings ............................... 3
G2143 Outside diameter circle measurement ..260 MEASUREMENT RESULT CONFIRMATION
G2144 Inside diameter circle measurement .....263 SCREEN ............................................................ 71
G2145 Outside width measurement .................265

i-2
B-64644EN-3/02

Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Soft key display in the cycle selection screen ...... 6
Setting Destination P Code Macro Data ............ 75 Stylus ball center offset A ................................... 65
Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the Stylus ball diameter ............................................ 64
Tool Offset ......................................................... 78
Measurement Result Confirmation Screen for the T
Workpiece Coordinate Offset ............................. 72 Tool Change Window ......................................... 27 1
Measurement Sensor Calibration ...................... 61 Tool Measurement .....................................51, 101
MEASUREMENT USING MDI MODE ............... 17 Turning tool ........................................................ 52
MENU SCREEN ................................................ 22 2
Milling tool .......................................................... 51 W
MODE SETTINGS ........................................... 296 Workpiece Measurement ................................... 28
MOTION SETTINGS ........................................ 309 Workpiece Setup ...................................... 108, 227 3
MOTION/MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES ..... 28 WORKPIECE SETUP (SPECIFIC ANGLE) ..... 283
Workpiece Setup (Specific Angle) .................... 172
O Workpiece Setup Expansion (Probe Z-Axis 4
OPERATION FLOW/SCREEN LAYOUT ........... 20 Direction) .......................................................... 184
OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE CREATION Workpiece slant .................................................. 46
SCREEN ............................................................ 14 5
OPERATIONS ON THE CYCLE SELECTION
SCREEN .............................................................. 8
Outer corner ....................................................... 41 6
Outer diameter circle .......................................... 30
Outer width ......................................................... 36
7
P
Post Machining Inspection ....................... 142, 255
POST MACHINING INSPECTION (SPECIFIC 8
ANGLE) ............................................................ 289
Post Machining Inspection (Specific Angle) ..... 178
Probe length ....................................................... 61 A1
Q
QUICK MANUAL MEASUREMENT ................... 19 A2
R
RETRACTING/RESTORING MODAL Z
INFORMATION ................................................ 298
Rotation axis position ......................................... 55

S
Setting not to close the screen when moving to
another screen ..................................................... 3
SET-UP GUIDANCE DURING TILTED
WORKPLACE MACHINING COMMAND
MODE .............................................................. 302
SET-UP GUIDANCE USED IN A MULTI-PATH
LATHE ............................................................. 301
Simple Measurement (Probe Z-Axis Direction) 191
Soft Key Display in the Cycle Creation Screen .. 12

i-3
B-64644EN-3/02

1
2

A1

A2

i-4
B-64644EN3/02

REVISION RECORD

Edition Date Contents of Revision


02 May, 2021 • Added the description of new functions. 1
01 Apr., 2017 -

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

r-1
B-64644EN-3/02

* B - 6 4 6 4 4 E N - 3 / 0 2 *

You might also like